insignia, v.8 (rev 2), en-vx (work nr: pp-109519a 50) · 2019. 11. 7. · 8 in brief head restraint...

Introduction .................................... 2In brief ............................................ 6Keys, doors and windows ............ 19Seats, restraints ........................... 43Storage ........................................ 71Instruments and controls ............. 86Lighting ...................................... 134Climate control ........................... 148Driving and operating ................. 160Vehicle care ............................... 237Service and maintenance .......... 282Technical data ........................... 286Customer information ................ 306Index .......................................... 316

Contents

2 Introduction

Introduction

Introduction 3

Vehicle specific dataPlease enter your vehicle's data onthe previous page to keep it easilyaccessible. This information isavailable in the sections "Service andmaintenance" and "Technical data"as well as on the identification plate.

IntroductionYour vehicle is a designedcombination of advanced technology,safety, environmental friendlinessand economy.This Owner's Manual provides youwith all the necessary information toenable you to drive your vehiclesafely and efficiently.Make sure your passengers areaware of the possible risk of accidentand injury which may result fromimproper use of the vehicle.You must always comply with thespecific laws and regulations of thecountry that you are in. These lawsmay differ from the information in thisOwner's Manual.Disregarding the description given inthis manual may affect your warranty.

When this Owner's Manual refers to aworkshop visit, we recommend yourVauxhall Authorised Repairer. Forgas vehicles, we recommend aVauxhall Authorised Repairerlicensed to service gas vehicles.All Vauxhall Authorised Repairersprovide first-class service atreasonable prices. Experiencedmechanics trained by Vauxhall workaccording to specific Vauxhallinstructions.The customer literature pack shouldalways be kept ready to hand in thevehicle.

Using this manual● This manual describes all options

and features available for thismodel. Certain descriptions,including those for display andmenu functions, may not apply toyour vehicle due to modelvariant, country specifications,special equipment oraccessories.

● The "In brief" section will give youan initial overview.

● The table of contents at thebeginning of this manual andwithin each section shows wherethe information is located.

● The index will enable you tosearch for specific information.

● This Owner's Manual depicts left-hand drive vehicles. Operation issimilar for right-hand drivevehicles.

● The Owner's Manual uses theengine identifier code. Thecorresponding sales designationand engineering code can befound in the section "Technicaldata".

● Directional data, e.g. left or right,or front or back, always relate tothe direction of travel.

● Displays may not support yourspecific language.

● Display messages and interiorlabelling are written in boldletters.

4 Introduction

Danger, Warnings andCautions

9 Danger

Text marked 9 Danger providesinformation on risk of fatal injury.Disregarding this information mayendanger life.

9 Warning

Text marked 9 Warning providesinformation on risk of accident orinjury. Disregarding thisinformation may lead to injury.

Caution

Text marked Caution providesinformation on possible damage tothe vehicle. Disregarding thisinformation may lead to vehicledamage.

SymbolsPage references are indicated with 3.3 means "see page".Chronological order to select menuentries in the vehicle personalisationis indicated with I.Page references and index entriesrefer to the indented headings givenin the section table of content.Thank you for choosing a Vauxhall.We wish you many hours ofpleasurable driving.Your Vauxhall Team

Introduction 5

6 In brief

In brief

Initial drive information

Vehicle unlocking

Press c to unlock the doors and loadcompartment. Open the doors bypulling the handles. To open thetailgate, push the brand emblem andopen the tailgate.Electronic key system 3 19, Centrallocking system 3 21, Loadcompartment 3 27.

Seat adjustmentLongitudinal adjustment

Pull handle, slide seat, releasehandle. Try to move the seat back andforth to ensure that the seat is lockedin place.Seat position 3 45, Manual seatadjustment 3 46, Power seatadjustment 3 48.

In brief 7

Backrest inclination

Turn handwheel. Do not lean onbackrest when adjusting.Seat position 3 45, Manual seatadjustment 3 46, Power seatadjustment 3 48.

Seat height

Lever pumping motionup : seat higherdown : seat lower

Seat position 3 45, Manual seatadjustment 3 46, Power seatadjustment 3 48.

Seat inclination

Press switchtop : front end higherbottom : front end lower

Seat position 3 45, Manual seatadjustment 3 46, Power seatadjustment 3 48.

8 In brief

Head restraint adjustment

Press release button, adjust height,engage.Head restraints 3 43.

Seat belt

Pull out the seat belt and fasten in beltbuckle. The seat belt must not betwisted and must fit close against thebody. The backrest must not be tiltedback too far (maximum approx. 25°).To unfasten belt, press red button onbelt buckle.Seat position 3 45, Seat belts3 54, Airbag system 3 56.

Mirror adjustmentInterior mirror

To adjust the mirror, move the mirrorhousing in the desired direction.Manual anti-dazzle interior mirror3 37, Automatic anti-dazzle interiormirror 3 38.

In brief 9

Exterior mirrors

Select the relevant exterior mirror bypushing left or right mirror button.LED in button indicates the selection.Then swivel the control to adjust themirror.Convex exterior mirrors 3 35,Electric adjustment 3 35, Foldingexterior mirrors 3 36, Heatedexterior mirrors 3 37.

Steering wheel adjustment

Unlock lever, adjust steering wheel,then engage lever and ensure it isfully locked. Do not adjust steeringwheel unless vehicle is stationary andsteering wheel lock has beenreleased.Airbag system 3 56.

10 In brief

Instrument panel overview

In brief 11

1 Power windows ..................... 382 Exterior mirrors ..................... 353 Central locking system .......... 214 Side air vents ...................... 1575 Cruise control ..................... 186

Speed limiter ....................... 188

Adaptive cruise control ....... 189

Forward collision alert ......... 1976 Turn and lane-change

signals, headlight flash,low/high beam, high beamassist ................................... 141

Exit lighting ......................... 145

Parking lights ...................... 142

Buttons for DriverInformation Centre .............. 112

7 Instruments ........................ 101

Driver Information Centre .... 1128 Buttons for Driver

Information Centre .............. 1129 Head-up display .................. 121

10 Windscreen wiper andwasher, headlight washer,rear wiper and washer ......... 88

11 Centre air vents .................. 15712 Hazard warning flashers .... 14113 Info-Display ........................ 11914 Anti-theft alarm system

status LED ........................... 3215 Electronic Stability Control . 182

Traction Control system ..... 18116 Glovebox .............................. 7117 Controls for Info-Display

operation ............................. 11918 Climate control system ........ 14819 Storage ................................. 7120 Sport/Tour mode ................ 183

Parking assist/Advancedparking assist ..................... 206

Lane keep assist ................ 228

Eco button for stop-startsystem ................................. 165

21 Manual transmission .......... 177

Automatic transmission ...... 173

22 Electric parking brake ......... 17923 Power switch ....................... 16224 Steering wheel adjustment . . 8725 Horn ..................................... 8826 Bonnet release lever .......... 23927 Fuse box ............................ 25928 Light switch ........................ 134

Headlight rangeadjustment ......................... 137

Front/rear fog lights ............ 142

Instrument illumination ....... 14329 Head-up display .................. 121

12 In brief

Exterior lightingAutomatic light control

AUTO : automatic light controlswitches automaticallybetween daytime runninglight and headlight

8 : sidelights9 : headlights

Automatic light control 3 135.

Fog lights> : front fog lightsr : rear fog light

Headlight flash, high beam andlow beam

headlight flash : pull leverhigh beam : push leverlow beam : push or pull lever

High beam 3 135.Headlight flash 3 137.LED headlights 3 138.High beam assist 3 138.

Turn and lane-change signals

lever up : right turn signallever down : left turn signal

Turn and lane-change signals3 141, Parking lights 3 142.

In brief 13

Hazard warning flashers

Operated by pressing ¨.Hazard warning flashers 3 141.

Horn

Press j.

Washer and wiper systemsWindscreen wiper

HI : fastLO : slowINT : interval wiping or automatic

wiping with rain sensorOFF : off

For a single wipe when thewindscreen wiper is off, press thelever down to position 1x.Windscreen wiper 3 88, Wiperblade replacement 3 244.

14 In brief

Windscreen washer

Pull lever.Windscreen and headlight washersystem 3 88, Washer fluid 3 242.

Rear window wiper

Turn outer cap to activate the rearwindow wiper:OFF : offINT : intermittent operationON : continuous operation

Rear window washer

Push lever.Washer fluid is sprayed on the rearwindow and the wiper wipes a fewtimes.Rear window wiper/washer 3 90.

In brief 15

Climate controlHeated rear window

Heating is operated by pressing b.Heated rear window 3 40.

Heated windscreen

Heating is operated by pressing ,.Heated windscreen 3 41.

Heated exterior mirrorsPressing b also activates the heatedexterior mirrors.Heated exterior mirrors 3 37.

Demisting and defrosting thewindows, air conditioning system

● Press á: fan automaticallyswitches to higher speed, the airdistribution is directed towardsthe windscreen.

● Set temperature control towarmest level.

● Switch on air conditioning A/C ifrequired.

● Switch on heated rear window b.● Open side air vents as required

and direct them towards the doorwindows.

Air conditioning system 3 148.

16 In brief

Demisting and defrosting thewindows, electronic climatecontrol

● Press à. Temperature and airdistribution are set automaticallyand the fan runs at high speed.

● Switch on air conditioningA/C ON in Climate setting menuby pressing CLIMATE, ifrequired.

● Switch on heated rear window b.Electronic climate control system3 151.

TransmissionManual transmission

Reverse: with the vehicle stationary,depress clutch pedal, press therelease button on the selector leverand engage the gear.Manual transmission 3 177.

Automatic transmission

P : park positionR : reverseN : neutral modeD : automatic modeM : manual mode< : upshift] : downshift

The selector lever can only be movedout of P when the ignition is on andthe brake pedal is applied. To engageP or R, press the release button.Automatic transmission 3 173.

In brief 17

Starting offCheck before starting off● Tyre pressure and condition

3 262, 3 300.● Engine oil level and fluid levels

3 240.● All windows, mirrors, exterior

lighting and number plates arefree from dirt, snow and ice andare operational.

● Proper position of mirrors, seats,and seat belts 3 35, 3 45,3 55.

● Brake function at low speed,particularly if the brakes are wet.

Starting the engine● Manual transmission: operate

clutch and brake pedal.● Automatic transmission: operate

brake pedal and move selectorlever to P or N.

● Do not operate accelerator pedal.

● Press Engine Start/Stop briefly.● The engine starts after a short

delay.Starting the engine 3 163.

Stop-start system

If the vehicle is at a low speed or at astandstill and certain conditions arefulfilled, an Autostop is activated.An Autostop is indicated by theneedle at the AUTOSTOP position inthe tachometer.A restart is indicated by the needle atthe idle speed position in thetachometer.Stop-start system 3 165.

18 In brief

Parking

9 Warning

● Do not park the vehicle on aneasily ignitable surface. Thehigh temperature of theexhaust system could ignite thesurface.

● Always apply the parkingbrake. Pull switch m forapprox. one second and checkif the control indicator milluminates.The electric parking brake isapplied when control indicatorm illuminates 3 107.

● Switch off the engine.● If the vehicle is on a level

surface or uphill slope, engagefirst gear or set the selectorlever to position P beforeswitching off ignition. On anuphill slope, turn the frontwheels away from the kerb.If the vehicle is on a downhillslope, engage reverse gear or

set the selector lever to positionP before switching off ignition.Turn the front wheels towardsthe kerb.

● Close the windows and thesunroof.

● Switch off ignition with powerbutton. Turn the steering wheeluntil the steering wheel lock isfelt to engage.

● Lock the vehicle by pressing thebutton on the door handle.Activate the anti-theft alarmsystem 3 32.

● The engine cooling fans may runafter the engine has beenswitched off 3 239.

Caution

After running at high enginespeeds or with high engine loads,operate the engine briefly at a lowload or run in neutral forapprox. 30 seconds beforeswitching off, in order to protectthe turbocharger.

Electronic key system 3 19, Layingthe vehicle up for a long period of time3 238.

Keys, doors and windows 19

Keys, doors andwindows

Keys, locks ................................... 19Electronic key system ................ 19Memorised settings ................... 21Central locking system .............. 21Automatic locking ...................... 25Child locks ................................. 26

Doors ........................................... 27Load compartment .................... 27

Vehicle security ............................ 32Anti-theft locking system ........... 32Anti-theft alarm system .............. 32Immobiliser ................................ 35

Exterior mirrors ............................ 35Convex shape ........................... 35Electric adjustment .................... 35Folding mirrors .......................... 36Heated mirrors ........................... 37Automatic dimming .................... 37Parking assist ............................ 37

Interior mirrors ............................. 37Manual anti-dazzle .................... 37Automatic anti-dazzle ................ 38

Windows ...................................... 38Windscreen ............................... 38Power windows ......................... 38Heated rear window .................. 40Heated windscreen .................... 41Sun visors .................................. 41

Roof ............................................. 41Sunroof ...................................... 41

Keys, locksElectronic key system

Enables a keyless operation of thefollowing functions:● central locking system 3 21● switching on ignition and starting

the engine 3 163

20 Keys, doors and windows

The electronic key simply needs to beon the driver's person.Additionally, the electronic keyincludes the functionality of the radioremote control:● central locking system● anti-theft alarm system● power windows

The hazard warning flashers confirmoperation.Handle the device with care, protectfrom moisture and high temperaturesand avoid unnecessary operation.

NoticeDo not put the electronic key in theload compartment.

Replacing battery in electronickeyReplace the battery as soon as thesystem no longer operates properlyor the range is reduced. The need forbattery replacement is indicated by amessage in the Driver InformationCentre 3 123.

Batteries do not belong in householdwaste. They must be disposed of atan appropriate recycling collectionpoint.

To replace:

1. Press button at the back of theelectronic key unit and extract thekey blade from the housing.


2. Insert the key blade again forapprox. 6 mm and turn the key toopen the housing. Furtherinsertion of the key blade candamage the housing.

3. Remove and replace battery. UseCR 2032 or equivalent battery.Pay attention to the installationposition.

4. Close the housing and insert keyblade.

Batteries do not belong in householdwaste. They must be disposed of atan appropriate recycling collectionpoint.

FaultIf the central locking cannot beoperated or the engine cannot bestarted, the cause may be one of thefollowing:● Fault in electronic key.● Electronic key is out of reception

range.● The battery voltage is too low.

● Overload of the central lockingsystem by operating at frequentintervals, the power supply isinterrupted for a short time.

● Interference from higher-powerradio waves from other sources.

To rectify the cause of the fault,change the position of the electronickey.Manual unlocking 3 21.

Memorised settingsWhenever the ignition is switched off,the following settings areautomatically memorised by theelectronic key:● automatic climate control● lighting● Infotainment system● central locking system● Sport mode settings● comfort settings

The saved settings are automaticallyused the next time the ignition isswitched on with the memorisedelectronic key 3 19.

A precondition is that Personalisationby Driver is activated in the personalsettings of the Info-Display. This mustbe set for each electronic key which isused. The status change is availableonly after locking and unlocking thevehicle.The assigned memory position of thepower seat is automatically recalledwhen switching on ignition and AutoMemory Recall is activated in theInfo-Display for the memorisedelectronic key.Power seat 3 48.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

Central locking systemUnlocks and locks doors, loadcompartment and fuel filler flap.A pull on an interior door handleunlocks the respective door. Pullingthe handle once more opens the door.NoticeIn the event of an accident in whichairbags or belt pretensioners aredeployed, the vehicle isautomatically unlocked.


NoticeA short time after unlocking with theelectronic key, the doors are beinglocked automatically if no door hasbeen opened. A precondition is thatthe setting is activated in the vehiclepersonalisation 3 125.

Electronic key system operation

The electronic key must be outsidethe vehicle, within a range of approx.one metre of the relevant door side.

Unlocking

Press the button on the respectiveexterior door handle and pull thehandle.Unlocking mode can be set in thevehicle personalisation menu in theInfo-Display. Two settings areselectable:● All doors, load compartment and

fuel filler flap will be unlocked bypressing the button on anyexterior handle once.

● Only the driver's door, loadcompartment and fuel filler flapwill be unlocked by pressing the

button on the driver's doorexterior handle once. To unlockall doors, press button twice.

The setting can be changed in themenu Settings in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

Locking

Press the button on any exterior doorhandle.All doors, load compartment and fuelfiller flap will be locked.


The system locks if any of thefollowing occurs:● It has been more than

five seconds since unlocking.● The button on an exterior handle

has been pressed twice withinfive seconds to unlock thevehicle.

● Any door has been opened andall doors are now closed.

If the driver's door is not closedproperly, the electronic key remains inthe vehicle or the ignition is not off,locking will not be permitted.If there have been two or moreelectronic keys in the vehicle and theignition was on once, the doors will belocked even if just one electronic keyis taken out of the vehicle.

Unlocking and opening the tailgateThe tailgate can be unlocked andopened handsfree via moving the footbelow the rear bumper or by pushingthe touchpad switch under the brandemblem when the electronic key is inrange. The doors remain locked.Load compartment 3 27.

Operation with buttons on theelectronic key

The central locking system can alsobe operated with the buttons on theelectronic key.UnlockingPress c.

Unlocking mode can be set in thevehicle personalisation menu in theInfo-Display. Two settings areselectable:● All doors, load compartment and

fuel filler flap will be unlocked bypressing c once.

● Only the driver's door and fuelfiller flap will be unlocked bypressing c once. To unlock alldoors, press c twice.

Select the relevant setting in Settings,I Vehicle in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 119.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.The setting can be saved for the keybeing used. Memorised settings3 21.LockingClose doors, load compartment andfuel filler flap.Press e.If the driver's door is not closedproperly, the central locking systemwill not work.


Passive lockingAutomatic locking 3 25.

ConfirmationOperation of central locking system isconfirmed by the hazard warningflashers. A precondition is that thesetting is activated in the vehiclepersonalisation 3 125.

Central locking buttonsLocks or unlocks all doors, the loadcompartment and fuel filler flap fromthe passenger compartment via aswitch in the driver's door panel.

Press e to lock. LED in buttonilluminates.Press c to unlock.

Operation with the key in case ofa central locking system faultIn case of a fault, e.g. vehicle batteryor electronic key battery isdischarged, the driver's door can belocked or unlocked with the key blade.

Push the button on the electronic keyand pull out the key blade.The lock cylinder in the driver's dooris covered by a cap.

Insert the key blade into the recess atthe bottom of the cap and swivel thekey upward.

Manual unlocking


Manually unlock the driver's door byinserting and turning the key blade inthe lock cylinder.The other doors can be opened bypulling the interior handle twice or bypressing c in the driver's door panel.The load compartment and fuel fillerflap will possibly not be unlocked.By switching on the ignition, the anti-theft locking system is deactivated.

Manual locking

Push inside locking knob of all doorsexcept driver's door or press e in thedriver's door panel. Then close thedriver's door and lock it from the

outside by turning the key in the lockcylinder. The fuel filler flap andtailgate are possibly not locked.

After locking, cover the lock cylinderwith the cap: insert the cap with thelower side in the recesses, swivel andpush the cap until it engages at theupper side.

Automatic lockingAutomatic locking after driving offThis security feature can beconfigured to automatically lock alldoors, load compartment and fuelfiller flap after driving off andexceeding a certain speed.When at a standstill after driving, thevehicle will be unlocked automaticallyas soon as the key is removed fromthe ignition switch, or with electronickey system when the ignition isswitched off.Activation or deactivation ofautomatic locking can be set in themenu Settings, I Vehicle in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 119.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.The setting can be saved for eachelectronic key being used 3 21.

Automatic relock after unlockingThis feature can be configured toautomatically lock all doors, loadcompartment and fuel filler flap a


short time after unlocking with theremote control or electronic key,provided no door has been opened.Activation or deactivation ofautomatic relock can be set in themenu Settings, I Vehicle in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 119.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.The setting can be saved for eachelectronic key being used 3 21.

Passive lockingThis feature locks the vehicleautomatically after several seconds ifan electronic key has beenrecognised previously inside thevehicle, all doors have then beenclosed and the electronic key doesnot remain within the vehicle.If the electronic key remains in thevehicle or the ignition is not off,passive locking will not be permitted.If there have been two or moreelectronic keys in the vehicle and theignition was on once, the featurelocks the vehicle if just one electronickey is taken out of the vehicle.

To prevent passive locking of thevehicle e.g. when refuelling or ifpassengers remain in the vehicle, thesystem must be disabled.To disable the system, press thecentral locking button c for a fewseconds while one door is open. Anacoustic signal sounds three times toconfirm deactivation. The functionremains disabled until the centrallocking button e is pressed or theignition is switched on.Activation or deactivation of passivelocking can be set in the menuSettings, I Vehicle in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 119.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.The setting can be saved for eachelectronic key being used 3 21.

Child locks

9 Warning

Use the child locks wheneverchildren are occupying the rearseats.

Move the pin in the rear door to thefront position. The door cannot beopened from the inside.To deactivate, move the pin to therear position.


DoorsLoad compartmentTailgate

OpeningGrand Sport

After unlocking, push the brandemblem and open the tailgate.

Sports Tourer, Country Tourer

After unlocking, push the touchpadswitch under the tailgate mouldingand open the tailgate manually.Central locking system 3 21.

Closing

Use the interior handle.Central locking system 3 21.

Power tailgate

9 Warning

Take care when operating thepower tailgate. Risk of injury,particularly to children.Keep a close watch on themovable tailgate when operating.Ensure that nothing becomes


trapped during operating and noone is standing within the movingarea.

The power tailgate can be operatedby:● Pressing X twice on the

electronic key. To preventunintended opening of thetailgate, X must be pressedlonger than during locking orunlocking.

● Handsfree operation with motionsensor below the rear bumper.

● The touchpad switch under theexterior tailgate moulding andC in the open tailgate.

● The switch C on the inside ofthe driver's door.

On vehicles with automatictransmission, the tailgate can only beoperated when the vehicle isstationary and with selector lever in P.The turn signal lights flash and achime sounds when the powertailgate is operating.

NoticeOperating the power tailgate doesnot operate the central lockingsystem. To open the tailgate with thebutton on the electronic key, or withthe touchpad switch under thetailgate moulding or via handsfreeoperation, it is not necessary tounlock the vehicle. A precondition isthat the electronic key is outside thevehicle, within a range of approx.one metre of the tailgate.Do not leave the electronic key in theload compartment.Lock the vehicle after closing if it wasunlocked previously.

Central locking system 3 21.

Operation with the electronic key

Press X twice to open or close thetailgate. To prevent unintendedopening of the tailgate, X must bepressed longer than during locking orunlocking.


Handsfree operation with motionsensor below the rear bumper

To open or close the tailgate, movethe foot below the rear bumper backand forth in the area where thehologram is projected on the ground.Do not hold the foot longer or movetoo slow below the bumper. Theelectronic key must be outside thevehicle, within a range of approx.one metre of the tailgate. When footmotion is being detected by thesensor, the system actuates thetailgate after a short delay.

9 Danger

Do not touch any vehicle partsbelow the vehicle duringhandsfree operation. There is arisk of injury from hot engine parts.

Operation with the touchpad switchunder the exterior tailgate moulding

To open the tailgate, press thetouchpad switch under the tailgatemoulding until the tailgate starts tomove. If the vehicle is locked, theelectronic key must be outside thevehicle, within a range of approx.one metre of the tailgate.

To close, press C in the opentailgate until the tailgate starts tomove.


Operation with the switch on theinside of the driver's door

Press C on the inside of the driver'sdoor until the tailgate starts to open orclose.

Stop or change direction ofmovementTo stop movement of the tailgateimmediately:● press X once on the electronic

key, or● press the touchpad switch under

the exterior tailgate moulding, or

● press C on the open tailgate,or

● press C on the inside of thedriver's door.

Pressing one of the switches againwill reverse the direction ofmovement.

Operation modesThe power tailgate has three modesof operation, which are controlled bythe switch C in the driver's door. Tochange the mode, turn the switch:

● Normal mode MAX: Powertailgate opens to full height.

● Intermediate mode 3/4: Powertailgate opens to a reducedheight that can be adjusted.

● Mode Off: Tailgate can only beoperated manually.

Adjust reduced opening height inintermediate mode1. Turn operation mode switch to

3/4.2. Open power tailgate with any

operation switch.3. Stop movement at the desired

height by pressing any operationswitch. If required, manually movethe stopped tailgate to the desiredposition.


4. Press and hold the button C onthe inside of the open tailgate forthree seconds.

NoticeAdjusting opening height should beprogrammed at ground level.

A chime sound indicates the newsetting and the turn signal lights willflash. The reduced height can only setat an opening angle of above 30°.When turning the adjuster wheel inthe driver's door to intermediate mode3/4, the power tailgate will stopopening at the newly set position.

The tailgate can only be held open ifa minimum height is exceeded(minimum opening angle from 30°).The opening height cannot beprogrammed below that height.

Safety functionIf the power tailgate encounters anobstacle during opening or closing,the direction of movement willautomatically be reversed slightly.Multiple obstacles in one power cyclewill deactivate the function. In thiscase, close or open the tailgatemanually.The power tailgate has pinch sensorson the side edges. If the sensorsdetect obstacles between tailgate andchassis, the tailgate will open, until itis activated again or closed manually.The safety function is indicated by awarning chime.Remove all obstacles beforeresuming normal power operation.If the vehicle is equipped with factory-fitted towing equipment and a traileris electrically connected, the powertailgate can only be opened with the

touchpad switch or closed with G inthe open tailgate. Ensure that thereare no obstacles in the moving area.

OverloadIf the power tailgate is repeatedlyoperated at short intervals, thefunction is disabled for some time.Move tailgate manually into endposition to reset the system.

General hints for operatingtailgate

9 Danger

Do not drive with the tailgate openor ajar, e.g. when transportingbulky objects, since toxic exhaustgases, which cannot be seen orsmelled, could enter the vehicle.This can cause unconsciousnessand even death.

Caution

Before opening the tailgate, checkoverhead obstructions, e.g. agarage door, to avoid damage to


the tailgate. Always check themoving area above and behind thetailgate.

NoticeThe installation of certain heavyaccessories onto the tailgate mayaffect its ability to remain open.NoticeThe operation of the power tailgateis disabled under low vehicle batteryconditions. In this case, the tailgatemay not even be manually operable.NoticeWith the power tailgate disabled andall doors unlocked, the tailgate canonly be operated manually. In thisevent, manually closing the tailgaterequires significantly greater force.NoticeAt low outside temperatures thetailgate may not open fully by itself.In this event, lift the tailgate manuallyto its normal end position.

Vehicle securityAnti-theft locking system

9 Warning

Do not use the system if there arepeople in the vehicle! The doorscannot be unlocked from theinside.

The system deadlocks all the doors.All doors must be closed otherwisethe system cannot be activated.Unlocking the vehicle disables themechanical anti-theft locking system.This is not possible with the centrallocking button.

Activating

Press e on the electronic key twicewithin five seconds.

Anti-theft alarm systemThe anti-theft alarm system iscombined with the central lockingsystem.It monitors:● doors, tailgate, bonnet● passenger compartment

including adjoining loadcompartment


● vehicle inclination, e.g. if it israised

● ignition

ActivationAll doors must be closed and theelectronic key of the electronic keysystem must not remain in thevehicle. Otherwise the system cannotbe activated.● self-activated 30 seconds after

locking the vehicle by pressingthe button on any exterior doorhandle.

● directly by pressing e twice withinfive seconds.

● with passive locking enabled:briefly activated after passivelocking occurs.

NoticeChanges to the vehicle interior suchas the use of seat covers, and openwindows or sunroof, could impair thefunction of passenger compartmentmonitoring.

Activation without monitoring ofpassenger compartment andvehicle inclination

Switch off the monitoring ofpassenger compartment and vehicleinclination when animals are beingleft in the vehicle, because of highvolume ultrasonic signals ormovements triggering the alarm. Alsoswitch off when the vehicle is on aferry or train.1. Close tailgate, bonnet, windows

and sunroof.2. Press o. LED in the button o

illuminates for a maximum often minutes.

3. Close doors.4. Activate the anti-theft alarm

system.Status message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.


Status LED

Status LED is integrated in the sensoron top of the instrument panel.Status during the first 30 seconds ofanti-theft alarm system activation:LED illuminates : test, arming delayLED flashesquickly

: doors, tailgate orbonnet notcompletely closed,or system fault

Status after system is armed:LED flashesslowly

: system is armed

Seek the assistance of a workshop inthe event of faults.

Deactivation

Unlocking the vehicle by pressing thebutton on any exterior door handledeactivates the anti-theft alarmsystem.The electronic key must be outsidethe vehicle, within a range of approx.one metre of the relevant door side.The system is not deactivated byunlocking the driver's door with thekey or with the central locking buttonin the passenger compartment.

AlarmWhen triggered, the alarm hornsounds and the hazard warning lightsflash simultaneously. The numberand duration of alarm signals arestipulated by legislation.The anti-theft alarm system can bedeactivated by pressing c, bypressing the switch on the doorhandle with electronic key system orswitching on the ignition.A triggered alarm, which has not beeninterrupted by the driver, will beindicated by the hazard warninglights. They will flash quickly threetimes the next time the vehicle isunlocked with the electronic key.Additionally, a warning message isdisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre after switching on the ignition.Vehicle messages 3 123.If the vehicle's battery is to bedisconnected (e.g. for maintenancework), the alarm siren must bedeactivated as follows: switch theignition on then off, then disconnectthe vehicle's battery within15 seconds.


ImmobiliserThe immobiliser is activatedautomatically.If the control indicator d flashes whenthe ignition is on, there is a fault in thesystem; the engine cannot be started.Switch off the ignition and repeat thestart attempt. Retry with the key in thetransmitter pocket. Operation onvehicles with electronic key system incase of failure 3 162.If the control indicator d continuesflashing, attempt to start the engineusing the spare key.Seek the assistance of a workshop.NoticeRadio Frequency Identification(RFID) tags may cause interferencewith the key. Do not have it placednear the key when starting thevehicle.NoticeThe immobiliser does not lock thedoors. You should always lock thevehicle after leaving it and switch onthe anti-theft alarm system 3 21,3 32.

Control indicator d 3 110. Exterior mirrorsConvex shapeThe convex exterior mirror on thedriver's side contains an asphericalarea and reduces blind spots. Theshape of the mirror makes objectsappear smaller, which will affect theability to estimate distances.Side blind zone assistant 3 214.

Electric adjustment


Select the relevant exterior mirror bypushing í for left mirror or ì for rightmirror. LED in button indicates theselection.Then swivel the control to adjust themirror.

Folding mirrors

For pedestrian safety, the exteriormirrors will swing out of their normalmounting position if they are struckwith sufficient force. Reposition themirror by applying slight pressure tothe mirror housing.

Electric folding

Push n. Both exterior mirrors willfold.Push n again to return both exteriormirrors to their original position.If an electrically folded mirror ismanually extended, pushing n willonly electrically extend the othermirror.

Folding mirrors with electronickey

Press e again after locking forone second to fold in mirrors.Press c again after unlocking forone second to fold out mirrors.This function can be activated ordeactivated in the Vehiclepersonalisation.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.The settings are automatically storedfor the key being used 3 21.


Heated mirrors

Operated by pressing b together withheated rear window. LED in buttonilluminates.Heating works with the enginerunning and is switched offautomatically after a short time.

Automatic dimmingDazzling by following vehicles at nightis automatically reduced by dimmingthe exterior mirror on the driver's side.

Parking assistFor mirrors with position memory, theexterior mirrors are automaticallyaimed at the rear tyres as a parkingaid when reverse gear is selected,except during trailer operation.Position memory 3 48.Activation or deactivation of thisfunction can be changed in vehiclepersonalisation.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

Interior mirrorsManual anti-dazzle

To reduce dazzle, adjust the lever onthe underside of the mirror housing.


Automatic anti-dazzle

Dazzle from following vehicles atnight is automatically reduced.

WindowsWindscreenWindscreen stickersDo not attach stickers such as tollroad stickers or similar on thewindscreen in the area of the interiormirror. Otherwise the detection zoneof the sensor and the view area of thecamera in the mirror housing could berestricted.

Windscreen replacement

Caution

If the vehicle has a front-lookingcamera sensor for the driverassistance systems, it is veryimportant that any windscreenreplacement is performedaccurately according to Vauxhallspecifications. Otherwise, thesesystems may not work properlyand there is a risk of unexpectedbehaviour and/or messages fromthese systems.

Caution

If the vehicle is equipped with aHead-up display, it is veryimportant that any windscreenreplacement is performedaccurately according to Vauxhallspecifications. Otherwise, thesystem may not work properly andthe image may look out of focus.

Power windows

9 Warning

Take care when operating thepower windows. Risk of injury,particularly to children.If there are children on the rearseats, switch on the child safetysystem for the power windows.Keep a close watch on thewindows when closing them.Ensure that nothing becomestrapped in them as they move.

Switch on ignition to operate powerwindows. Retained power off 3 163.


Operate # for the respectivewindow by pushing to open or pullingto close.Pushing or pulling gently to the firstdetent: window moves up or down aslong as the switch is operated.Pushing or pulling firmly to the seconddetent then releasing: window movesup or down automatically with safetyfunction enabled. To stop movement,operate the switch once more in thesame direction.

Safety functionIf the window glass encountersresistance above the middle of thewindow during automatic closing, it isimmediately stopped and openedagain.

Override safety functionIn the event of closing difficulties dueto frost or the like, switch on theignition, then pull the switch to the firstdetent and hold. The window movesup without safety function enabled.To stop movement, release theswitch.

Child safety system for rearwindows

Press V to deactivate rear doorpower windows; the LED illuminates.To activate, press V again.

Operating windows from outsideThe windows can be operatedremotely from outside the vehicle.


Press and hold c for more than twoseconds to open windows.Press and hold e for more than twoseconds to close windows.Release button to stop windowmovement.If the windows are fully opened orclosed, the hazard warning lights willflash twice.

OverloadIf the windows are repeatedlyoperated within short intervals, thewindow operation is disabled forsome time.

Initialising the power windowsIf the windows cannot be closedautomatically (e.g. afterdisconnecting the vehicle battery), awarning message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.Vehicle messages 3 123.Activate the window electronics asfollows:1. Close doors.2. Switch on ignition.3. Pull the switch until the window is

closed and keep pulling foradditional two seconds.

4. Push the switch until the windowis completely open and keeppushing for additionaltwo seconds.

5. Repeat for each window.

Heated rear window

Operated by pressing b together withheated exterior mirrors. LED in buttonilluminates.Heating works with the enginerunning and is switched offautomatically after a short time.


Heated windscreen

Operated by pressing ,. LED inbutton illuminates.Heating works with the enginerunning and is switched offautomatically after a short time.Pressing , once more during thesame ignition cycle allows the heatingto operate for another three minutes.

Sun visorsThe sun visors can be folded down orswivelled to the side to preventdazzling.

The covers of the mirrors should beclosed when driving.A ticket holder is located on thebackside of the sun visor.

RoofSunroof

9 Warning

Take care when operating thesunroof. Risk of injury, particularlyto children.Keep a close watch on themovable parts when operatingthem. Ensure that nothingbecomes trapped in them as theymove.

Switch on ignition to operate thesunroof.


Open or closePress * or r gently to the firstdetent: sunroof is opened or closedas long as the switch is operated.Press * or r firmly to the seconddetent then release: the sunroof isopened or closed automatically.During closing the safety function isenabled. To stop movement, operatethe switch once more.

Raise or closePress + or r: sunroof is raised orclosed automatically. During closingthe safety function is enabled.

SunblindThe sunblind is manually operated.Close or open the sunblind by sliding.When the sunroof is open, thesunblind is always open.

General hints

Safety functionIf the sunroof encounters resistanceduring automatic closing, it isimmediately stopped and openedagain.

Override safety functionIn the event of closing difficulties, e.g.due to frost, hold the switch rpressed to the second detent. Thesunroof closes with safety functiondisabled. To stop movement, releasethe switch.

Closing sunroof from outsideThe sunroof can be closed remotelyfrom outside the vehicle.

Press and hold e for more than twoseconds to close the sunroof.Release the button to stop themovement.

Initialising after a power failureAfter a power failure, it may only bepossible to operate the sunroof to alimited extent. Have the systeminitialised by your workshop.

Seats, restraints 43

Seats, restraints

Head restraints ............................ 43Front seats ................................... 45

Seat position .............................. 45Manual seat adjustment ............ 46Power seat adjustment .............. 48Armrest ...................................... 51Heating ...................................... 52Ventilating .................................. 52Massage .................................... 53

Rear seats ................................... 53Armrest ...................................... 53Heating ...................................... 53

Seat belts ..................................... 54Three-point seat belt ................. 55

Airbag system .............................. 56Front airbag system ................... 59Side airbag system .................... 60Curtain airbag system ............... 60Airbag deactivation .................... 61

Child restraints ............................. 62Child restraint systems .............. 62Child restraint installationlocations ................................... 65

Pedestrian protection system ...... 69Active bonnet ............................. 69

Head restraints

Position

9 Warning

Only drive with the head restraintset to the proper position.

The upper edge of the head restraintshould be at upper head level. If thisis not possible for extremely tallpeople, set to highest position, andset to lowest position for small people.

44 Seats, restraints

Adjustment

Head restraints on front seats

Height adjustment

Press release button, adjust height,engage.

Horizontal adjustment

Press release button, pull bolster ofhead restraint forwards slowly. Itengages in several positions.

Head restraints on rear seats

Height adjustmentPull the head restraint upwards orpress the catch to release and pushthe head restraint downwards.

Removal of rear head restraintsE.g. for load compartment extension3 73.


Press both catches, pull the headrestraint upwards and remove.

Front seatsSeat position

9 Warning

Only drive with the seat correctlyadjusted.

9 Danger

Do not sit closer than 25 cm to thesteering wheel, to permit safeairbag deployment.

9 Warning

Never adjust seats while driving asthey could move uncontrollably.

9 Warning

Never store any objects under theseats.

● Sit with buttocks as far backagainst the backrest as possible.Adjust the distance between theseat and the pedals so that legsare slightly angled when fullypressing the pedals. Slide thefront passenger seat as far backas possible.

● Set seat height high enough tohave a clear field of vision on allsides and of all displayinstruments. There should be atleast one hand of clearancebetween head and the roofframe. Your thighs should restlightly on the seat withoutpressing into it.


● Sit with shoulders as far backagainst the backrest as possible.Set the backrest rake so that it ispossible to easily reach thesteering wheel with arms slightlybent. Maintain contact betweenshoulders and the backrest whenturning the steering wheel. Donot angle the backrest too farback. We recommend amaximum rake of approx. 25°.

● Adjust seat and steering wheel ina way that the wrist rests on topof the steering wheel while thearm is fully extended andshoulders on the backrest.

● Adjust the steering wheel 3 87.● Adjust the head restraint 3 43.● Adjust the thigh support so that

there is a space approx. twofingers wide between the edge ofthe seat and the hollow of theknee.

● Adjust the lumbar support so thatit supports the natural shape ofthe spine.

Manual seat adjustmentDrive only with engaged seats andbackrests.

Longitudinal adjustment

Pull handle, slide seat, releasehandle. Try to move the seat back andforth to ensure that the seat is lockedin place.


Turn handwheel. Do not lean onbackrest when adjusting.


Seat height

Lever pumping motionup : seat higherdown : seat lower

Seat inclination

Press switchtop : front end higherbottom : front end lower

Lumbar support

Adjust lumbar support using the four-way switch to suit personalrequirements.Moving support up and down: pushswitch up or down.Increasing and decreasing support:push switch forwards or backwards.


Adjustable thigh support

Pull the lever and slide the thighsupport.

Power seat adjustment

9 Warning

Care must be taken whenoperating the power seats. Thereis a risk of injury, particularly forchildren. Objects could becometrapped.

Keep a close watch on the seatswhen adjusting them. Vehiclepassengers should be informedaccordingly.

Longitudinal adjustment

Move switch forwards/backwards.

Seat height

Move switch upwards/downwards.

Seat inclination


Tilt front of switch upwards/downwards.


Tilt switch forwards/backwards.

Lumbar support

Adjust lumbar support using thefour-way switch to suit personalrequirements.Moving support up and down: pushswitch up or down.Increasing and decreasing support:push switch forwards or backwards.

Adjustable thigh support

Pull the lever and slide the thighsupport.


Side bolster

Adjust seat backrest width to suitpersonal requirements.Press e to reduce backrest width.Press d to increase backrest width.

Memory function for power seatadjustment and exterior mirrorsTwo different driver's seat andexterior mirror settings can be stored.Memorised settings 3 21, Vehiclepersonalisation 3 125.

Storing memory position● Adjust driver's seat and then

adjust exterior mirrors to desiredpositions.

● Press and hold MEM and 1 or 2simultaneously until a chimesounds.

Recall of memory positionsPress and hold button1 or 2 until thestored seat and exterior mirrorpositions have been reached.Releasing the button during seatmovement cancels the recall.

Automatic recall of memory positionsMemory positions are assigned to thedriver (1 or 2) using the respective keyand are automatically recalled whenthe ignition is switched on. In addition,a message in the Driver InformationCentre indicates the driver number,identified by the used key. If theignition is switched on more thanthree subsequent times with thesame key, the message will not bedisplayed again until another key isbeing used.To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory-, power mirror- orpower seat controls.Precondition is that PersonalizationBy Driver and Auto Memory Recall isactivated in the personal settings ofthe Info-Display.This function can be activated ordeactivated in the vehiclepersonalisation.Select the relevant setting in theVehicle menu in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 119.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.


Easy exit functionFor a convenient exit out of thevehicle, the power driver seat movesrearwards when vehicle is stationary.To activate the easy exit function:● set selector lever to position P

(automatic transmission)● apply parking brake (manual

transmission)● switch off ignition● remove key from the ignition

switch● open the driver's door

If the door is already open, switch offignition to activate easy exit.To stop movement, press one of thememory or power seat controls.This function can be activated ordeactivated in the vehiclepersonalisation.Select the relevant setting in theVehicle menu in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 119.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

Safety functionIf the driver's seat encountersresistance during movement, therecall may stop. After removing theobstruction, press and hold theappropriate memory position buttonfor two seconds. Try recalling thememory position again. If the recalldoes not operate, consult aworkshop.

OverloadIf the seat setting is electricallyoverloaded, the power supply isautomatically cut-off for a short time.NoticeAfter an accident in which airbagshave been deployed, the memoryfunction for each position button willbe deactivated.

Armrest

Push button and fold armrestupwards. Under the armrest there isa storage compartment and aninductive charger.Inductive charging 3 94.


Heating

Adjust heating to the desired settingby pressing ß for the respective seatone or more times. The controlindicator in the button indicates thesetting.Prolonged use of the highest settingfor people with sensitive skin is notrecommended.The seat heating will be reducedautomatically from highest level tomedium level after 30 minutes.Seat heating is operational whenengine is running and during anAutostop.

Stop-start system 3 165.

Automatic seat heatingDepending on the equipment, theautomatic seat heating can beenabled in the vehicle personalisationmenu in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.When enabled, the heating of theseats will be activated automaticallyat vehicle start. The activation isbased on several parameters such asvehicle interior temperature, intensityand direction of the sun andtemperature setting of the electronicclimate control system for the driverand passenger side.As the vehicle's interior warms up, theseat heating level will be reducedautomatically until it finally goes off.The seat heating level being providedduring the automatic operation isshown by heated seat indicator lights.If the passenger seat is unoccupied,the automatic seat heating feature willnot activate the seat heating for thatseat.

The seat heating buttons can bepressed at any time to exit theautomatic seat heating for therespective seat and control the seatheating manually instead.

Ventilating

Adjust ventilation to the desiredsetting by pressing A for therespective seat one or more times.The control indicator in the buttonindicates the setting.Ventilated seats are operational whenengine is running and during anAutostop.Stop-start system 3 165.


Massage

Press c to switch on the backmassage function.To switch off, press c again. Thecurrent massage procedure will beended, this may take a few seconds.After ten minutes the massagefunction is switched off automatically.

Rear seatsArmrest

Fold armrest down. The armrestcontains cupholders.

Heating

Activate seat heating by pressing ßfor the respective rear outer seat.Activation is indicated by the LED inthe button.Press ß once more to deactivate seatheating.Prolonged use for people withsensitive skin is not recommended.Seat heating is operational whenengine is running and during anAutostop.Stop-start system 3 165.


Seat belts

The seat belts are locked duringheavy acceleration or deceleration ofthe vehicle, holding the occupants inthe seat position. Thereby the risk ofinjury is considerably reduced.

9 Warning

Fasten seat belt before each trip.In the event of an accident, peoplenot wearing seat belts endangertheir fellow occupants andthemselves.

Seat belts are designed to be used byonly one person at a time. Childrestraint system 3 62.Periodically check all parts of the beltsystem for damage, soiling andproper functionality.Have damaged components replacedby a workshop. After an accident,have the belts and triggered beltpretensioners replaced by aworkshop.NoticeMake sure that the belts are notdamaged by shoes or sharp-edgedobjects or are trapped. Prevent dirtfrom getting into the belt retractors.

Seat belt reminderEach seat is equipped with a seat beltreminder, indicated for front seats bycontrol indicators X and k, or for rearseats by the symbol X in the DriverInformation Centre 3 105.

Belt force limitersStress on the body is reduced by thegradual release of the belt during acollision.

Belt pretensionersIn the event of a head-on, rear-end orside-on collision of a certain severity,the front and rear seat belts aretightened. The front seat belts and theouter rear seat belts are tightened byone pretensioner per seat.

9 Warning

Incorrect handling (e.g. removal orfitting of belts) can trigger the beltpretensioners.

Deployment of the belt pretensionersis indicated by continuous illuminationof control indicator v 3 106.Triggered belt pretensioners must bereplaced by a workshop. Beltpretensioners can only be triggeredonce.NoticeDo not affix or install accessories orother objects that may interfere withthe operation of the beltpretensioners. Do not make anymodifications to belt pretensionercomponents as this will invalidatethe operating permit of your vehicle.


Three-point seat beltFasten

Withdraw the belt from the retractor,guide it untwisted across the bodyand insert the latch plate into thebuckle. Tighten the lap belt regularlywhilst driving by pulling the shoulderbelt.

Loose or bulky clothing prevents thebelt from fitting snugly. Do not placeobjects such as handbags or mobilephones between the belt and yourbody.

9 Warning

The belt must not rest against hardor fragile objects in the pockets ofyour clothing.

Seat belt reminder X, k 3 105.

Unfasten

To release belt, press red button onbelt buckle.


Using the seat belt while pregnant

9 Warning

The lap belt must be positioned aslow as possible across the pelvisto prevent pressure on theabdomen.

Airbag systemThe airbag system consists of anumber of individual systemsdepending on the scope ofequipment.When triggered, the airbags inflatewithin milliseconds. They also deflateso quickly that it is often unnoticeableduring the collision.

9 Warning

The airbag system deploys in anexplosive manner, repairs must beperformed by skilled personnelonly.

9 Warning

Adding accessories that changethe vehicle's frame, bumpersystem, height, front end or sidesheet metal, may keep the airbagsystem from working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing anyparts of the front seats, seat belts,

airbag sensing and diagnosticmodule, steering wheel,instrument panel, inner door sealsincluding the speakers, any of theairbag modules, ceiling or pillartrim, front sensors, side impactsensors or airbag wiring.

NoticeThe airbag systems and beltpretensioner control electronics arelocated in the centre console area.Do not put any magnetic objects inthis area.Do not affix any objects onto theairbag covers and do not cover themwith other materials. Have damagedcovers replaced by a workshop.Each airbag is triggered only once.Have deployed airbags replaced bya workshop. Furthermore, it may benecessary to have the steeringwheel, the instrument panel, parts ofthe panelling, the door seals,handles and the seats replaced.


Do not make any modifications tothe airbag system as this willinvalidate the vehicle operatingpermit.

Control indicator v for airbag systems3 106.

Child restraint systems on frontpassenger seat with airbagsystemsWarning according to ECE R94.02:

EN: NEVER use a rearward-facingchild restraint on a seat protected byan ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it;DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to theCHILD can occur.

DE: Nach hinten gerichteteKindersitze NIEMALS auf einem Sitzverwenden, der durch einen davorbefindlichen AKTIVEN AIRBAGgeschützt ist, da dies den TOD oderSCHWERE VERLETZUNGEN DESKINDES zur Folge haben kann.FR: NE JAMAIS utiliser un sièged'enfant orienté vers l'arrière sur unsiège protégé par un COUSSINGONFLABLE ACTIF placé devant lui,sous peine d'infliger desBLESSURES GRAVES, voireMORTELLES à l'ENFANT.ES: NUNCA utilice un sistema deretención infantil orientado haciaatrás en un asiento protegido por unAIRBAG FRONTAL ACTIVO. Peligrode MUERTE o LESIONES GRAVESpara el NIÑO.RU: ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯустанавливать детскоеудерживающее устройство лицомназад на сиденье автомобиля,оборудованном фронтальнойподушкой безопасности, еслиПОДУШКА НЕ ОТКЛЮЧЕНА! Это

может привести к СМЕРТИ илиСЕРЬЕЗНЫМ ТРАВМАМРЕБЕНКА.NL: Gebruik NOOIT een achterwaartsgericht kinderzitje op een stoel meteen ACTIEVE AIRBAG ervoor, omDODELIJK of ERNSTIG LETSEL vanhet KIND te voorkomen.DA: Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendtautostol på et forsæde med AKTIVAIRBAG, BARNET kan komme iLIVSFARE eller komme ALVORLIGTTIL SKADE.SV: Använd ALDRIG en bakåtvändbarnstol på ett säte som skyddas meden framförvarande AKTIV AIRBAG.DÖDSFALL eller ALLVARLIGASKADOR kan drabba BARNET.FI: ÄLÄ KOSKAAN sijoita taaksepäinsuunnattua lasten turvaistuintaistuimelle, jonka edessä onAKTIIVINEN TURVATYYNY, LAPSIVOI KUOLLA tai VAMMAUTUAVAKAVASTI.NO: Bakovervendtbarnesikringsutstyr må ALDRI brukespå et sete med AKTIVKOLLISJONSPUTE foran, da det kan


føre til at BARNET utsettes forLIVSFARE og fare for ALVORLIGESKADER.PT: NUNCA use um sistema deretenção para crianças voltado paratrás num banco protegido com umAIRBAG ACTIVO na frente domesmo, poderá ocorrer a PERDA DEVIDA ou FERIMENTOS GRAVES naCRIANÇA.IT: Non usare mai un sistema disicurezza per bambini rivoltoall'indietro su un sedile protetto daAIRBAG ATTIVO di fronte ad esso:pericolo di MORTE o LESIONIGRAVI per il BAMBINO!EL: ΠΟΤΕ μη χρησιμοποιείτε παιδικόκάθισμα ασφαλείας με φορά προς ταπίσω σε κάθισμα που προστατεύεταιαπό μετωπικό ΕΝΕΡΓΟ ΑΕΡΟΣΑΚΟ,διότι το παιδί μπορεί να υποστείΘΑΝΑΣΙΜΟ ή ΣΟΒΑΡΟΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ.PL: NIE WOLNO montować fotelikadziecięcego zwróconego tyłem dokierunku jazdy na fotelu, przedktórym znajduje się WŁĄCZONAPODUSZKA POWIETRZNA.Niezastosowanie się do tego

zalecenia może być przyczynąŚMIERCI lub POWAŻNYCHOBRAŻEŃ u DZIECKA.TR: Arkaya bakan bir çocuk emniyetsistemini KESİNLİKLE önünde birAKTİF HAVA YASTIĞI ilekorunmakta olan bir koltuktakullanmayınız. ÇOCUK ÖLEBİLİRveya AĞIR ŞEKİLDEYARALANABİLİR.UK: НІКОЛИ не використовуйтесистему безпеки для дітей, щовстановлюється обличчям назад,на сидінні з УВІМКНЕНОЮПОДУШКОЮ БЕЗПЕКИ, інакше цеможе призвести до СМЕРТІ чиСЕРЙОЗНОГО ТРАВМУВАННЯДИТИНИ.HU: SOHA ne használjon hátrafelénéző biztonsági gyerekülést előlrőlAKTÍV LÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen,mert a GYERMEK HALÁLÁT vagyKOMOLY SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.HR: NIKADA nemojte koristiti sustavzadržavanja za djecu okrenut premanatrag na sjedalu s AKTIVNIMZRAČNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega,to bi moglo dovesti do SMRTI iliOZBILJNJIH OZLJEDA za DIJETE.

SL: NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškegavarnostnega sedeža, obrnjenega vnasprotni smeri vožnje, na sedež zAKTIVNO ČELNO ZRAČNOBLAZINO, saj pri tem obstajanevarnost RESNIH ali SMRTNIHPOŠKODB za OTROKA.SR: NIKADA ne koristiti bezbednosnisistem za decu u kome su decaokrenuta unazad na sedištu saAKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIMJASTUKOM ispred sedišta zato štoDETE može da NASTRADA ili da seTEŠKO POVREDI.MK: НИКОГАШ не користете детскоседиште свртено наназад наседиште заштитено со АКТИВНОВОЗДУШНО ПЕРНИЧЕ пред него,затоа што детето може ДА ЗАГИНЕили да биде ТЕШКО ПОВРЕДЕНО.BG: НИКОГА не използвайтедетска седалка, гледаща назад,върху седалка, която е защитеначрез АКТИВНА ВЪЗДУШНАВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА пред нея - може дасе стигне до СМЪРТ илиСЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ наДЕТЕТО.


RO: Nu utilizaţi NICIODATĂ un scaunpentru copil îndreptat spre partea dinspate a maşinii pe un scaun protejatde un AIRBAG ACTIV în faţa sa;acest lucru poate duce la DECESULsau VĂTĂMAREA GRAVĂ aCOPILULUI.CS: NIKDY nepoužívejte dětskýzádržný systém instalovaný protisměru jízdy na sedadle, které jechráněno před sedadlem AKTIVNÍMAIRBAGEM. Mohlo by dojít kVÁŽNÉMU PORANĚNÍ nebo ÚMRTÍDÍTĚTE.SK: NIKDY nepoužívajte detskúsedačku otočenú vzad na sedadlechránenom AKTÍVNYM AIRBAGOM,pretože môže dôjsť k SMRTI aleboVÁŽNYM ZRANENIAM DIEŤAŤA.LT: JOKIU BŪDU nemontuokite atgalatgręžtos vaiko tvirtinimo sistemossėdynėje, prieš kurią įrengta AKTYVIORO PAGALVĖ, nes VAIKAS GALIŽŪTI arba RIMTAI SUSIŽALOTI.LV: NEKĀDĀ GADĪJUMĀneizmantojiet uz aizmuguri vērstubērnu sēdeklīti sēdvietā, kas tiekaizsargāta ar tās priekšā uzstādītu

AKTĪVU DROŠĪBAS SPILVENU, jopretējā gadījumā BĒRNS var gūtSMAGAS TRAUMAS vai IET BOJĀ.ET: ÄRGE kasutage tahapoolesuunatud lapseturvaistet istmel, milleees on AKTIIVSE TURVAPADJAGAkaitstud iste, sest see võibpõhjustada LAPSE SURMA võiTÕSISE VIGASTUSE.MT: QATT tuża trażżin għat-tfal lijħares lejn in-naħa ta’ wara fuq sitprotett b’AIRBAG ATTIV quddiemu;dan jista’ jikkawża l-MEWT jewĠRIEĦI SERJI lit-TFAL.GA: Ná húsáid srian sábháilteachtalinbh cúil RIAMH ar shuíochán abhfuil mála aeir ag feidhmiú os achomhair. Tá baol BÁIS nó GORTÚDONA don PHÁISTE ag baint leis.Beyond the warning required byECE R94.02, for safety reasons aforward-facing child restraint systemmust only be used subject to theinstructions and restrictions in thetable 3 65.The airbag label is located on bothsides of the front passenger sun visor.Airbag deactivation 3 61.

Front airbag systemThe front airbag system consists ofone airbag in the steering wheel andone in the instrument panel on thefront passenger side. These can beidentified by the word AIRBAG.The front airbag system is triggered inthe event of a front-end impact of acertain severity. The ignition must beswitched on.

The inflated airbags cushion theimpact, thereby reducing the risk ofinjury to the upper body and head ofthe front seat occupantsconsiderably.


9 Warning

Optimum protection is onlyprovided when the seat is in theproper position.Seat position 3 45.Keep the area in which the airbaginflates clear of obstructions.Fit the seat belt correctly andengage securely. Only then is theairbag able to protect.

Side airbag system

The side airbag system consists of anairbag in each front seat backrest andin the rear outboard seat backrests.This can be identified by the wordAIRBAG.The side airbag system is triggered inthe event of a side impact of a certainseverity. The ignition must beswitched on.

The inflated airbags cushion theimpact, thereby reducing the risk ofinjury to the upper body and pelvis inthe event of a side-on collisionconsiderably.

9 Warning

Keep the area in which the airbaginflates clear of obstructions.

NoticeOnly use protective seat covers thathave been approved for the vehicle.Be careful not to cover the airbags.

Curtain airbag systemThe curtain airbag system consists ofan airbag in the roof frame on eachside. This can be identified by theword AIRBAG on the roof pillars.The curtain airbag system is triggeredin the event of a side-on impact of acertain severity. The ignition must beswitched on.


The inflated airbags cushion theimpact, thereby reducing the risk ofinjury to the head in the event of aside-on impact considerably.

9 Warning

Keep the area in which the airbaginflates clear of obstructions.The hooks on the handles in theroof frame are only suitable forhanging up light articles ofclothing, without coat hangers. Donot keep any items in theseclothes.

Airbag deactivationThe front passenger airbag systemmust be deactivated for child restraintsystem on the passenger seataccording to the instructions in thetable 3 65. The side airbag andcurtain airbag systems, the beltpretensioners and all driver airbagsystems will remain active.

The front passenger airbag systemcan be deactivated via a key-operated switch on the passengerside of the instrument panel.

Use the key blade, located in theelectronic key, to choose the position:*OFF

: front passenger airbag isdeactivated and will notinflate in the event of acollision. Control indicator* OFF illuminatescontinuously in the centreconsole

VON

: front passenger airbag isactive


9 Danger

Deactivate passenger airbag onlyin combination with the use of achild restraint system, subject tothe instructions and restrictions inthe table 3 65.Otherwise, there is a risk of fatalinjury for a person occupying aseat with a deactivated frontpassenger airbag.

If the control indicator V illuminatesfor approx. 60 seconds after theignition is switched on, the frontpassenger airbag system will inflatein the event of a collision.

If the control indicator * illuminatesafter the ignition is switched on, thefront passenger airbag system isdeactivated. It stays on while theairbag is deactivated.If both control indicators areilluminated at the same time, there isa system failure. The status of thesystem is not discernible, thereforeno person is allowed to occupy thefront passenger seat. Contact aworkshop immediately.Consult a workshop immediately ifneither of the two control indicatorsare illuminated.Change status only when the vehicleis stopped with the ignition off.Status remains until the next change.Control indicator for airbagdeactivation 3 106.

Child restraintsChild restraint systems

9 Danger

If using a rear-facing child restraintsystem on the front passengerseat, the airbag system for thefront passenger seat must bedeactivated. This also applies tocertain forward-facing childrestraint systems as indicated inthe tables 3 65.

Airbag deactivation 3 61, Airbag label3 56.We recommend a child restraintsystem which is tailored specifically tothe vehicle. For further information,contact your workshop.When a child restraint system is beingused, pay attention to the followingusage and installation instructionsand also those supplied with the childrestraint system.


Always comply with local or nationalregulations. In some countries, theuse of child restraint systems isforbidden on certain seats.Child restraint systems can befastened with:● Three-point seat belt● ISOFIX brackets● Top-tether

Three-point seat beltChild restraint systems can befastened by using a three-point seatbelt. Depending on the size of theused child restraint systems, up tothree child restraint systems can beattached to the rear seats 3 65.

ISOFIX brackets

Fasten vehicle-approved ISOFIXchild restraint systems to the ISOFIXbrackets. Specific vehicle ISOFIXchild restraint system positions aremarked in the ISOFIX table 3 65.ISOFIX brackets are indicated by alabel on the backrest.An i-size child restraint system is anuniversal ISOFIX child restraintsystem according UN Regulation No.129.All i-size child restraint systems canbe used on any vehicle seat suitablefor i-size, i-size table 3 65.

Either a Top-tether strap or a supportleg must be used in addition to theISOFIX brackets.

i-size child seats and vehicle seatswith i-size approval are marked withi-size symbol, see illustration.

Top-tether anchorsTop-tether anchors are marked withthe symbol : for a child seat.


In addition to the ISOFIX mountingbrackets, fasten the Top-tether strapto the Top-tether anchors.ISOFIX child restraint systems ofuniversal category positions aremarked in the table by IUF 3 65.

Selecting the right systemThe rear seats are the mostconvenient location to fasten a childrestraint system.Children should travel facingrearwards in the vehicle as long aspossible. This makes sure that thechild's backbone, which is still veryweak, is under less strain in the eventof an accident.Suitable are restraint systems thatcomply with valid UN ECEregulations. Check local laws andregulations for mandatory use of childrestraint systems.The following child restraints arerecommended for the followingweight classes:

Maxi Cosi Cabriofix for children up to13 kg for group 0, group 0+ and DuoPlus for children from 13 kg to 18 kgin group I.Ensure that the child restraint systemto be installed is compatible with thevehicle type.Ensure that the mounting location ofthe child restraint system within thevehicle is correct, see followingtables.Allow children to enter and exit thevehicle only on the side facing awayfrom the traffic.When the child restraint system is notin use, secure the seat with a seat beltor remove it from the vehicle.NoticeDo not affix anything on the childrestraint systems and do not coverthem with any other materials.A child restraint system which hasbeen subjected to stress in anaccident must be replaced.


Child restraint installation locationsPermissible options for fastening a child restraint system with a three-point seat belt

Weight classOn front passenger seat

On rear outboard seats On rear centre seatactivated airbag deactivated airbag

Group 0: up to 10 kg X U1,2 U/L3 U

Group 0+: up to 13 kg X U1,2 U/L3 U

Group I: 9 to 18 kg X U1,2 U/L3,4 U4

Group II: 15 to 25 kg U1,2 X U/L3,4 U4

Group III: 22 to 36 kg U1,2 X U/L3,4 U4

U : universal suitability in conjunction with three-point seat beltL : suitable for particular child restraint systems of the 'specific-vehicle', 'restricted' or 'semi-universal' categories. The

child restraint system must be approved for the specific vehicle type (refer to the vehicle type list of the child restraintsystem)

X : no child restraint system permitted in this weight class1 : move seat forwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest as far as necessary to a vertical position to ensure

that the belt runs forwards from the upper anchorage point2 : move seat upwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest as far as necessary to a vertical position to ensure

that the belt is tight on the buckle side3 : move the respective front seat ahead of the child restraint system forwards as far as necessary4 : adjust the respective headrest as necessary or remove if required


Permissible options for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system with ISOFIX brackets

Weight class Size class FixtureOn front passenger seat On rear outboard

seatsOn rear centreseatactivated airbag deactivated airbag

Group 0: up to 10 kg G ISO/L2 X X X X

F ISO/L1 X X X X

E ISO/R1 X X IL3 X

Group 0+: up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL3 X

D ISO/R2 X X IL3 X

C ISO/R3 X X IL3 X

Group I: 9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 X X IL3,4 X

C ISO/R3 X X IL3,4 X

B ISO/F2 X X IL, IUF3,4 X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IL, IUF3,4 X

A ISO/F3 X X IL, IUF3,4 X

Group II: 15 to 25 kg X X IL3,4 X

Group III: 22 to 36 kg X X IL3,4 X


IL : suitable for particular ISOFIX restraint systems of the 'specific-vehicle', 'restricted' or 'semi-universal' categories.The ISOFIX restraint system must be approved for the specific vehicle type (refer to the vehicle type list of the childrestraint system)

IUF : suitable for ISOFIX forward-facing child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this weight classX : no ISOFIX child restraint system approved in this weight class1 : move seat forwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest inclination as far as necessary to a vertical position

to ensure that the belt runs forwards from the upper anchorage point2 : move seat height adjustment upwards as far as necessary and adjust seat backrest inclination as far as necessary

to a vertical position to ensure that the belt is tight on the buckle side3 : move the respective front seat ahead of the child restraint system forwards as far as necessary4 : adjust the respective headrest as necessary or remove if required

ISOFIX size class and seat deviceA – ISO/F3 : forward-facing child restraint system for children of maximum size in the weight class 9 to 18 kgB – ISO/F2 : forward-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class 9 to 18 kgB1 – ISO/F2X : forward-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class 9 to 18 kgC – ISO/R3 : rear-facing child restraint system for children of maximum size in the weight class up to 18 kgD – ISO/R2 : rear-facing child restraint system for smaller children in the weight class up to 18 kgE – ISO/R1 : rear-facing child restraint system for young children in the weight class up to 13 kgF– ISO/L1 : left lateral facing position child restraint system (carry-cot)G – ISO/L2 : right lateral facing position child restraint system (carry-cot)

Permissible options for fitting an i-Size child restraint system with ISOFIX brackets

On front passenger seatOn rear outboard seats On rear centre seatactivated airbag deactivated airbag

i-Size child restraint systems X X i - U X


i - U : suitable for i-Size 'universal' forward and rearward facing child restraint systemsX : seating position not suitable for i-Size 'universal' child restraint systems


Pedestrian protectionsystemActive bonnetPedestrian protection system canhelp to reduce the injury ofpedestrians in case of a frontcollision.When the sensors in the front bumperdetect a certain impact within thespeed range of 15 mph to 31 mph, therear part of the bonnet will be lifted toreduce pedestrians head injuries.In addition the front bumper isdesigned to reduce leg injuries ofpedestrians.The active bonnet can be triggeredonly once and remains in the raisedposition. A message is displayed inthe Driver Information Centre.Seek the assistance of a workshop assoon as possible, thereby adaptingthe driving style, to have theactuators, hinges and bonnetreplaced.

9 Warning

Do not drive with the bonnetraised.

9 Warning

After any frontal accident the frontbumper may appear to be intact,however, the sensors may bedamaged. Consult a workshop toverify proper functionality of thesensors.

The system may not trigger under thefollowing conditions:● The impact is out of sensor

range.● The sensors are damaged or

blocked by accessory parts.● The bonnet is blocked by snow or

ice.● The vehicle speed is not within

the range.● The object is too small.

Manually bonnet lowering

9 Warning

After the system has triggered, thehinges of the bonnet are hot. Donot touch.

To manually lower the triggeredbonnet for driving to the nextworkshop:1. Pull the bonnet release lever.2. Push the safety catch to left

vehicle side.3. Open the bonnet approx. 20 cm

and lower it slowly withoutengaging.

4. Push down bonnet with bothhands at rear corners in smallsteps alternating between rightand left side.

9 Warning

Be sure to keep away from theedge of the bonnet to preventinjuries.


5. Check that the bonnet is engagedat the rear.

6. Close bonnet at the front andcheck that it is engaged 3 239.

Storage 71

Storage

Storage compartments ................ 71Glovebox ................................... 71Cupholders ................................ 71Front storage ............................. 72Sunglasses storage ................... 72Armrest storage ......................... 72Centre console storage ............. 72

Load compartment ....................... 73Load compartment cover ........... 76Rear floor storage cover ............ 78Rear storage .............................. 78Lashing eyes ............................. 79Cargo management system ...... 79Safety net .................................. 79Warning triangle ........................ 82First aid kit ................................. 82

Roof rack system ......................... 83Roof rack ................................... 83

Loading information ..................... 84

Storage compartments

9 Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in the storagecompartments. Otherwise, thestorage compartment lid couldopen and vehicle occupants couldbe injured by objects being thrownaround in the event of hardbraking, a sudden change indirection or an accident.

Glovebox

The glovebox should be closed whilstdriving.

Cupholders

Cupholders are located in the centreconsole behind a cover. Open thecover.

72 Storage

Additional cupholders are located inthe rear armrest. Fold down armrest.

Front storage

A storage box is located in the centreconsole. Push cover to the front.

Sunglasses storage

Fold down and open.Do not use for storing heavy objects.

Armrest storageStorage in the front armrest

Push button to fold up the armrest.

Centre console storageThe storage container can be used tostore small items.Depending on the version, thestorage compartment is locatedunder a cover.

Storage 73

Press cover at the rear to open.

Load compartmentDepending on the equipment, therear seat backrest is divided into twoor three parts. All parts can be foldeddown.Before folding rear seat backrests,execute the following if necessary:● Remove the load compartment

cover 3 76.● Press and hold the catch to push

the head restraints down 3 43.● Remove the rear head restraints

to have the backrests fully rest onthe seat cushions 3 43.

Load compartment extension(two-part rear seat backrest)

● Pull the release lever on one orboth outer sides and fold downthe backrests onto the seatcushion.

● To fold up, raise the backrestsand guide them into an uprightposition until they engageaudibly. Make sure that the beltsare positioned correctly and stayclear of the folding area.

74 Storage

The backrests are properlyengaged when the red mark nearthe release lever is no longervisible.

9 Warning

When folding up, ensure thatbackrests are securely locked inposition before driving. Failure todo so may result in personal injuryor damage to the load or vehicle inthe event of hard braking or acollision.

The seat belt of the centre seat couldbe blocked when the backrest isfolded up too quickly. To unlock theretractor, push in the seat belt or pullit out by approx. 20 mm then release.

Load compartment extension(three-part rear seat backrest)● Fold up the rear armrest.

● Pull the loop and fold down thebackrest of the centre seat.


9 Warning

Take care when folding down theright outer seat backrest if thecentre seat backrest is alreadyfolded down. Risk of injury due tobolt protruding from the inner sideof the backrest.

Storage 75


9 Warning

Take care when folding down theright outer seat backrest if thecentre seat backrest is alreadyfolded down. Risk of injury due tobolt protruding from the inner sideof the backrest.

● Alternatively fold seat backrestsfrom the load compartment: pullswitch on left or right sidewall ofthe load compartment to fold thecorresponding part of the rearseat backrest.

9 Warning

Take care when operating the rearbackrests from the loadcompartment. The backrest isfolded with considerable force.Risk of injury, particularly tochildren.

Ensure that nothing is attached tothe rear seats or located on theseat cushion.

● To fold up, raise the backrestsand guide them into an uprightposition until they engageaudibly. Make sure that the beltsare positioned correctly and stayclear of the folding area.

The backrests are properlyengaged when the red mark nearthe release lever is no longervisible.

76 Storage

9 Warning

When folding up, ensure thatbackrests are securely locked inposition before driving. Failure todo so may result in personal injuryor damage to the load or vehicle inthe event of hard braking or acollision.

The seat belt of the centre seat couldbe blocked when the backrest isfolded up too quickly. To unlock theretractor, push in the seat belt or pullit out by approx. 20 mm then release.

Load compartment coverDo not place any objects on the cover.

Grand Sport

Removing cover

Unhook retaining straps from tailgate.

Lift cover at the rear and at the front.Remove the cover.

Fitting coverEngage cover in side guides and folddownwards. Attach the retainingstraps to the tailgate.


Closing roller blindPull the roller blind using the handletowards the rear and upwards until itengages in the sideward retainers.

Storage 77

Opening roller blind

Pull the roller blind handle to the rearand downwards. It rolls upautomatically.

Opening roller blind in load position

Press the roller blind handle.The rear of the roller blind is guidedupwards automatically.

Removing roller blind

Open the roller blind.Pull the release lever on the right sideup an hold it. Lift the roller blind firston the right side and remove fromretrainers.

Installing roller blindInsert the left side of the roller blind inrecess, then pull release lever up.Hold and insert the right side of theroller blind in recess and engage.

78 Storage

Rear floor storage coverGrand Sport

The rear floor cover can be removed.Raise cover at the loop and remove.

Sports Tourer, Country TourerThe rear floor cover can be removed.Raise cover at the loop and remove.

Pull the handle and fold the rear partof the cover forward.

Set up the folded cover upright behindthe rear seat backrests.

Rear storageStorage box

A storage box is located in the loadcompartment. Remove the cover togain access to the storage box.

Storage 79

Lashing eyes

The lashing eyes are designed tosecure items against slippage, e.g.using lashing straps or luggage net.

Cargo management systemThe cargo rail system is a movablesystem to secure items at the the loadcompartment floor against slippage.

Mounting carriages in the rail

Insert carriages into the rails at theload compartment floor. Thereby usethe recess in the rail and press thebutton on the carriage while insertingit.

Using the lashing eyes

Press the button on a carriage andslide it to the required position. Foldup the lashing eyes to use them.RemovingFold down the lashing eyes. Press thebutton of a carriage and remove itfromt the rail via recess.

Safety netThe safety net can be installed behindthe rear seats. If the rear seatbackrests are folded the safety netcan be installed behind the frontseats.

80 Storage

Passengers must not be transportedbehind the safety net.

Behind the rear seats

Installation

● Insert the cassette into retainerson left and right side. Note thesigns L (left side) and R (rightside) on the cassette as aninstallation hint.Turn cassette slightly forwarduntil the arrows face each other,to lock the cassette.

● Pull safety net rod out ofcassette. Suspend and engagesafety net rod into installationopening on one side of the roofframe. Compress rod andsuspend and engage at the otherside.

Remove load compartment cover3 76

Removal● Remove and compress one side

of safety net rod from installationopening. Remove other side ofsafety net rod from installationopening.

● Roll up safety net.

● Turn cassette slightly backwardsto unlock and remove fromretainers.

Storage 81

Behind the front seats

Installation

● Suspend and engage safety netrod into installation opening onone side of the roof frame.Compress rod, suspend andengage at the other side. Pullsafety net rod out of cassette.

● Attach hooks of safety netcassette to lashing eyes in thefloor in front of rear seats. To getaccess to the lashing eyes, pushhooks in the perforated parts inthe floor cover on both sides.

● Tension both straps by pulling atthe loose end.

● Push down head restraints andfold down rear seat backrests3 73.

Removal

● Pull the flap at the tightener onboth sides to release the straps.

● Remove and compress one sideof safety net rod from installationopening. Remove other side ofsafety net rod from installationopening.

● Roll up safety net.● Detach hooks from the lashing

eyes.

82 Storage

Warning triangleGrand Sport

Stow the warning triangle in the spaceat the rear of the load compartment.


Stow the warning triangle with theretaining straps of the tailgate innerpanelling.

First aid kitGrand Sport

Stow the first aid kit on the right sideof the load compartment and secureit with the strap.

Storage 83


Stow the first aid kit with the retainingstraps of the tailgate inner panelling.

Roof rack systemRoof rackFor safety reasons and to avoiddamage to the roof, the vehicleapproved roof rack system isrecommended. For furtherinformation, contact your workshop.

Mounting roof rack

Grand Sport

Open all doors.Mounting points are located in eachdoor frame of the vehicle body.

Fasten the roof rack according to theinstallation instructions delivered withthe roof rack.Remove the roof rack when not inuse.


Mounting points are located in eachroof railing.Fasten the roof rack on the first twomounting points according to theinstallation instructions delivered withthe roof rack.Remove the roof rack when not inuse.

84 Storage

Loading information

● Heavy objects in the loadcompartment should be placedagainst the seat backrests. Makesure that the backrests aresecurely engaged, i.e. no longershowing the red markings on theside near the release lever. Ifobjects can be stacked, heavierobjects should be placed at thebottom.

● Secure objects with lashingstraps attached to lashing eyes3 79.

● Secure loose objects in the loadcompartment to prevent fromsliding.

● When transporting objects in theload compartment, the backrestsof the rear seats must not beangled forward.

● Do not allow the load to protrudeabove the upper edge of thebackrests.

● Do not place any objects on theload compartment cover or theinstrument panel, and do notcover the sensor on top of theinstrument panel.

● The load must not obstruct theoperation of the pedals, parkingbrake and gear selector, orhinder the freedom of movementof the driver. Do not place anyunsecured objects in the interior.

● Do not drive with an open loadcompartment.

9 Warning

Always ensure that the load in thevehicle is securely stowed.Otherwise objects can be thrownaround inside the vehicle andcause personal injury or damageto the load or vehicle.

● The payload is the differencebetween the permitted grossvehicle weight (see identificationplate 3 286) and the EC kerbweight.To calculate the payload, enterthe data for your vehicle in theweights table at the front of thismanual.The EC kerb weight includesweights for the driver (68 kg),luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fueltank 90% full).Optional equipment andaccessories increase the kerbweight.

● Driving with a roof load increasesthe sensitivity of the vehicle tocross-winds and has a

Storage 85

detrimental effect on vehiclehandling due to the vehicle'shigher centre of gravity.Distribute the load evenly andsecure it properly with retainingstraps. Adjust the tyre pressureand vehicle speed according tothe load conditions. Check andretighten the straps frequently.Do not drive faster than 75 mph.The permissible roof load is100 kg. The roof load is thecombined weight of the roof rackand the load.

86 Instruments and controls

Instruments andcontrols

Controls ....................................... 87Steering wheel adjustment ........ 87Steering wheel controls ............. 87Heated steering wheel ............... 88Horn ........................................... 88Windscreen wiper/washer ......... 88Rear window wiper/washer ....... 90Outside temperature .................. 91Clock ......................................... 91Power outlets ............................. 93Inductive charging ..................... 94Ashtrays .................................... 95

Warning lights, gauges and indi‐cators ........................................... 96

Instrument cluster ...................... 96Speedometer ........................... 101Odometer ................................ 102Trip odometer .......................... 102Tachometer ............................. 103Fuel gauge .............................. 103Engine coolant temperaturegauge ..................................... 104

Service display ........................ 104Control indicators .................... 105

Turn signal ............................... 105Seat belt reminder ................... 105Airbag and belt tensioners ....... 106Airbag deactivation .................. 106Charging system ..................... 107Malfunction indicator light ........ 107Brake and clutch system ......... 107Electric parking brake .............. 107Electric parking brake fault ...... 107Antilock brake system (ABS) ... 108Gear shifting ............................ 108Following distance ................... 108Lane keep assist ..................... 108Electronic Stability Control off . 108Electronic Stability Control andTraction Control system ......... 108

Traction Control system off ..... 109Engine coolant temperature .... 109Preheating ............................... 109AdBlue ..................................... 109Tyre pressure monitoringsystem .................................... 109

Engine oil pressure .................. 109Low fuel ................................... 110Immobiliser .............................. 110Exterior light ............................ 110High beam ............................... 110High beam assist ..................... 110LED headlights ........................ 110Fog light ................................... 110

Rear fog light ........................... 111Cruise control .......................... 111Adaptive cruise control ............ 111Vehicle detected ahead ........... 111Pedestrian detection ................ 111Speed limiter ........................... 111Traffic sign assistant ................ 111Door open ................................ 111

Information displays ................... 112Driver Information Centre ........ 112Info display .............................. 119Head-up display ...................... 121

Vehicle messages ...................... 123Warning chimes ....................... 124Battery voltage ........................ 124

Vehicle personalisation .............. 125Telematics service ..................... 129

OnStar ..................................... 129

Instruments and controls 87

ControlsSteering wheel adjustment

Unlock lever, adjust steering wheel,then engage lever and ensure it isfully locked.Do not adjust steering wheel unlessvehicle is stationary and steeringwheel lock has been released.

Steering wheel controlsDriver Information Centre, somedriver assistance systems,Infotainment system and a connectedmobile phone can be operated via thecontrols on the steering wheel.

The illustrations show differentversions.

Driver Information Centre 3 112.Driver assistance systems 3 186.Further information is available in theInfotainment manual.


Heated steering wheel

Activate heating by pressing *.Activation is indicated by the LED inthe button.Heating is operational when theengine is running and during anAutostop.Stop-start system 3 165.

Horn

Press j.

Windscreen wiper/washerWindscreen wiper with adjustablewiper interval

HI : fastLO : slowINT : interval wipingOFF : off

For a single wipe when thewindscreen wiper is off, press thelever downwards to position 1x.Do not use if the windscreen is frozen.Switch off in car washes.


Adjustable wiper interval

Wiper lever in position INT.Turn the adjuster wheel to adjust thewiping frequency.

Windscreen wiper with rainsensor

HI : fastLO : slowAUTO : automatic wiping with rain

sensorOFF : off

In AUTO position, the rain sensordetects the amount of water on thewindscreen and automaticallyregulates the frequency of thewindscreen wiper.For a single wipe when thewindscreen wiper is off, press thelever downwards to position 1x.Do not use if the windscreen is frozen.

Switch off in car washes.

Adjustable sensitivity of the rainsensor

Wiper lever in position AUTO.Turn the adjuster wheel to adjust thesensitivity of the rain sensor.


Keep the sensor free from dust, dirtand ice.Rain sensor function can be activatedor deactivated in the Vehiclepersonalisation.Select the relevant setting in Settings,I Vehicle in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 119.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

Windscreen washer

Pull lever. Washer fluid is sprayedonto the windscreen and the wiperwipes a few times.Washer fluid 3 242.

Rear window wiper/washerRear window wiper

Turn outer cap to activate the rearwindow wiper:OFF : offINT : intermittent operationON : continuous operation

Do not use if the rear window isfrozen.Switch off in car washes.The rear window wiper comes onautomatically when the windscreenwiper is switched on and reverse gearis engaged.


Activation or deactivation of thisfunction can be changed in the menuSettings in the Info-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

Rear window washer

Push lever.Washer fluid is sprayed onto the rearwindow and the wiper wipes a fewtimes.The rear window washer system isdeactivated when the fluid level islow.Washer fluid 3 242.

Outside temperatureA drop in temperature is indicatedimmediately and a rise in temperatureafter a time delay.

Illustration shows an example.

If outside temperature drops to 3 °C,a warning message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.

9 Warning

The road surface may already beicy even though the displayindicates a few degrees above 0°C.

ClockDate and time are shown in theInfo-Display.Info-Display 3 119.


7'' Colour-Info-DisplayPress ; and then select Settings.Select Time and Date to display therespective submenu.

Set Time FormatTo select the desired time format,touch the screen buttons 12 h or 24 h.

Set Date FormatTo select the desired date format,select Set Date Format and choosebetween the available options in thesubmenu.

Auto SetTo choose whether time and date areto be set automatically or manually,select Auto Set.For time and date to be setautomatically, select On - RDS.For time and date to be set manually,select Off - Manual. If Auto Set is setto Off - Manual, the submenu itemsSet Time and Set Date becomeavailable.

Set time and dateTo adjust the time and date settings,select Set Time or Set Date.Touch + and - to adjust the settings.

8'' Colour-Info-DisplayPress ; and then select theSettings icon.Select Time and Date.

Set timeSelect Set Time to enter therespective submenu.

Select Auto Set at the bottom of thescreen. Activate either On - RDS orOff - Manual.If Off - Manual is selected, adjusthours and minutes by touching n oro.Touch 12-24 Hr on the right side of thescreen to select a time mode.If 12-hour mode is selected, a thirdcolumn for AM and PM setting isdisplayed. Select the desired option.

Set dateSelect Set Date to enter therespective submenu.


NoticeIf date information is automaticallyprovided, this menu item is notavailable.

Select Auto Set at the bottom of thescreen. Activate either On - RDS orOff - Manual.If Off - Manual is selected, adjust thedate by touching n or o.

Clock displaySelect Clock Display to enter therespective submenu.To turn off the digital clock display inthe menus, select Off.

Power outlets

A 12 Volt power outlet is located in thecentre console.

Sports Tourer, Country Tourer: A12 Volt power outlet is located at theleft sidewall in the load compartment.Do not exceed the maximum powerconsumption of 120 watts.With ignition off, the power outlet isdeactivated. Additionally, the poweroutlet is deactivated in the event oflow vehicle battery voltage.Electrical accessories that areconnected must comply with theelectromagnetic compatibilityrequirements laid down inDIN VDE 40 839.Do not connect any current-deliveringaccessories, e.g. electrical chargingdevices or batteries.Do not damage the outlets by usingunsuitable plugs.Stop-start system 3 165.


USB charging port

An USB port for charging devices islocated below the foldable armrest.The USB port has also a dataconnection to the Infotainmentsystem. For further information, seeInfotainment manual.

Two USB ports for charging devicesonly are located in the back of thecentre console.NoticeThe sockets must always be keptclean and dry.

Inductive charging

9 Warning

Inductive charging can affect theoperation of implantedpacemakers or other medicaldevices. If applicable, seekmedical advice before using theinductive charging device.

9 Warning

Remove any metal objects fromthe charging device beforecharging a mobile phone, as theseobjects could become very hot.

To charge a device, the ignition mustbe switched on.The charging slot is located below thefront armrest.


To charge a mobile device:1. Remove all objects from the

charging slot otherwise thesystem may not charge.

2. Insert the mobile device with thedisplay facing to the rear in thecharging slot. Charging status isindicated in the Info display 0 andshows if mobile device is properlypositioned.

If 0 is not displayed, remove mobiledevice from the slot. Turn mobiledevice 180 degrees and wait threeseconds before inserting mobiledevice again.PMA or Qi compatible mobile devicescan be charged inductively.A back cover with an integrated coil(e.g. Samsung 4 and 5) or a jacket(e.g. some iPhone models) may berequired to charge a mobile deviceThe mobile device must be smallerthan 8 cm in width and 15 cm in lengthto fit into the charging device.Protective cover for the mobile phonecould have impact on the inductivecharging.

Ashtrays

Caution

To be used only for ash and not forcombustible rubbish.

A portable ashtray can be placed inthe cupholders.


Warning lights, gaugesand indicatorsInstrument clusterDepending on the version, threeinstrument clusters are available:● Baselevel● Midlevel● Uplevel

Uplevel instrument cluster can bedisplayed as Sport mode or Tourmode.


Baselevel instrument cluster


Midlevel instrument cluster


Uplevel instrument cluster, Sport mode


Uplevel instrument cluster, Tour mode


Overview

O Turn signal 3 105

X Seat belt reminder 3 105

v Airbag and belt tensioners3 106

V Airbag deactivation 3 106

p Charging system 3 107

Z Malfunction indicator light3 107

R Brake and clutch system 3 107

m Electric parking brake 3 107

j Electric parking brake fault3 107

u Antilock brake system (ABS)3 108

R Gear shifting 3 108

E Following distance 3 108

a Lane keep assist 3 108

n Electronic Stability Control off3 108

b Electronic Stability Control andTraction Control system 3 108

k Traction Control system off3 109

W Engine coolant temperature3 109

! Preheating 3 109

Y AdBlue 3 109

w Tyre pressure monitoringsystem 3 109

I Engine oil pressure 3 109

Y Low fuel 3 110

d Immobiliser 3 110

8 Exterior light 3 110

C High beam 3 110

f High beam assist 3 110

f LED headlights 3 110

> Fog light 3 110

r Rear fog light 3 111

m Cruise control 3 111

C Adaptive cruise control 3 111

A Vehicle detected ahead 3 111

7 Pedestrian detected ahead3 204

L Speed limiter 3 111

L Traffic sign assistant 3 111

h Door open 3 111

Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed.


Odometer

The total recorded distance isdisplayed in miles.

Trip odometerThe recorded distance since the lastreset is displayed on the trip computerpage.Trip odometer counts up to9,999 miles and then restarts at 0.Two trip odometer pages areselectable for different trips.

Baselevel instrument cluster

Select ; by pressing Menu on theturn signal lever. Turn adjuster wheelon turn signal lever and select ;1or ;2. Each trip odometer page canbe reset separately by pressingSET/CLR on the turn signal lever fora few seconds on the respectivemenu.

Midlevel instrument cluster

Select Info page J on main menu.Choose page Trip A or Trip B bypressing o on the steering wheel.Each trip odometer can be resetseparately when ignition is on: selectrespective page, press >. Confirm bypressing 9.Driver Information Centre 3 112.


Uplevel instrument cluster

Select Info page on main menu.Choose page Trip A or Trip B bypressing o on the steering wheel.Each trip odometer can be resetseparately when ignition is on: selectrespective page, press >. Confirm bypressing 9.

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed.Drive in a low engine speed range foreach gear as much as possible.

Caution

If the needle is in the red warningzone, the maximum permittedengine speed is exceeded. Engineat risk.

Fuel gauge

Displays the level in the fuel tank.The arrow indicates the vehicle sidewhere the fuel filler flap is located.Control indicator Y illuminates if thelevel in the tank is low. Refuelimmediately if it flashes.Never run the fuel tank dry.Because of the fuel remaining in thetank, the top-up quantity may be lessthan the specified fuel tank capacity.


Engine coolant temperaturegauge

Displays the coolant temperature.50° : engine operating

temperature not yetreached

90°(centralarea)

: normal operatingtemperature

130° : temperature too high

NoticeIf engine coolant temperature is toohigh, stop vehicle, idle engine.Danger to engine. Check coolantlevel.

Service displayThe engine oil life system informswhen to change the engine oil andfilter. Based on driving conditions, theinterval at which an engine oil andfilter change will be indicated can varyconsiderably.

The remaining oil life duration menuis displayed in the Driver InformationCentre 3 112.

On Baselevel display select ? bypressing MENU on the turn signallever. Turn the adjuster wheel toselect the Remaining Oil Life page.


On Mid- and Uplevel display selectInfo Menu by pressing è on steeringwheel. Press å to select RemainingOil Life page.Remaining oil life duration is indicatedin percentage.

ResetOn Baselevel display pressSET/CLR on turn signal lever forseveral seconds to reset. The ignitionmust be switched on but engine notrunning.On Mid- and Uplevel display pressé on steering wheel to open thesubfolder. Select Reset and confirmby pressing 9 for several seconds.The ignition must be switched on butengine not running.The system must be reset every timethe engine oil is changed to allowproper functionality. Seek theassistance of a workshop.

Next serviceWhen the system has calculated thatengine oil life has been diminished,Change Engine Oil Soon appears in

the Driver Information Centre. Haveengine oil and filter changed by aworkshop within one week or300 miles (whichever occurs first).Service information 3 282.

Control indicatorsThe control indicators described arenot present in all vehicles. Thedescription applies to all instrumentversions. Depending on theequipment, the position of the controlindicators may vary. When theignition is switched on, most controlindicators will illuminate briefly as afunctionality test.The control indicator colours mean:red : danger, important reminderyellow : warning, information, faultgreen : confirmation of activationblue : confirmation of activationwhite : confirmation of activation

See all control indicators on differentinstrument clusters 3 96.

Turn signalO illuminates or flashes green.

Illuminates brieflyThe parking lights are switched on.

FlashesA turn signal or the hazard warningflashers are activated.Rapid flashing: failure of a turn signallight or associated fuse, failure of turnsignal light on trailer.Bulb replacement 3 245, Fuses3 255.Turn signals 3 141.

Seat belt reminderSeat belt reminder on front seatsX for driver's seat illuminates orflashes red in the instrument cluster.


k for front passenger seat illuminatesor flashes red in the roof console,when seat is occupied.

IlluminatesAfter the ignition has been switchedon until the seat belt has beenfastened.

FlashesAfter having started the engine for amaximum of 100 seconds until theseat belt has been fastened.

Seat belt status on rear seats(vehicles with Baselevel display)X illuminates or flashes white or greyin the Driver Information Centre, afterhaving started the engine.

Illuminates whiteSeat belt is unfastened.

Illuminates greySeat belt has been fastened.

Flashes white or greyFastened seat belt has beenunfastened.Fastening the seat belt 3 55.

Seat belt status on rear seats(vehicles with Mid- or Upleveldisplay)X illuminates green or grey or flashesyellow in the Driver InformationCentre, after having started theengine.

Illuminates greySeat belt is unfastened.

Illuminates greenSeat belt has been fastened.

Flashes yellowFastened seat belt has beenunfastened.Fastening the seat belt 3 55.

Airbag and belt tensionersv illuminates red.When the ignition is switched on, thecontrol indicator illuminates forapprox. four seconds. If it does notilluminate, does not go out afterfour seconds or illuminates whilstdriving, there is a fault in the airbagsystem. Seek the assistance of a

workshop. The airbags and beltpretensioners may fail to trigger in theevent of an accident.Deployment of the belt pretensionersor airbags is indicated by continuousillumination of v.

9 Warning

Have the cause of the faultremedied immediately by aworkshop.

Belt pretensioners, airbag system3 54, 3 56.

Airbag deactivation

V illuminates yellow.The front passenger airbag isactivated.* illuminates yellow.


The front passenger airbag isdeactivated.Airbag deactivation 3 61.

Charging systemp illuminates red.Illuminates when the ignition isswitched on and extinguishes shortlyafter the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine isrunningStop, switch off engine. Vehiclebattery is not charging. Enginecooling may be interrupted. Thebrake servo unit may cease to beeffective. Seek the assistance of aworkshop.

Malfunction indicator lightZ illuminates or flashes yellow.Illuminates when the ignition isswitched on and extinguishes shortlyafter the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine isrunningFault in the emission control system.The permitted emission limits may beexceeded.On diesel engines, the cleaningprocess of the diesel particle filter ispotentially not possible.Seek the assistance of a workshopimmediately.

Flashes when the engine isrunningFault that could lead to catalyticconverter damage. Ease up on theaccelerator until the flashing stops.Seek the assistance of a workshopimmediately.

Brake and clutch systemR illuminates red.The brake and clutch fluid level is toolow.

9 Warning

Stop. Do not continue yourjourney. Consult a workshop.

Electric parking brakem illuminates or flashes red.

IlluminatesElectric parking brake is applied3 179.

FlashesElectric parking brake is not fullyapplied or released. Depress thebrake pedal and attempt to reset thesystem by first releasing thenapplying the electric parking brake. Ifm remains flashing, do not drive andseek the assistance of a workshop.

Electric parking brake faultj illuminates or flashes yellow.

IlluminatesElectric parking brake is operatingwith degraded performance 3 179.


FlashesElectric parking brake is in servicemode. Stop vehicle, apply andrelease the electric parking brake toreset.

9 Warning

Have the cause of the faultremedied immediately by aworkshop. Avoid parking oninclines until the cause of the faulthas been remedied.

Antilock brake system(ABS)u illuminates yellow.Illuminates for a few seconds after theignition is switched on. The system isready for operation when the controlindicator extinguishes.If the control indicator does not go outafter a few seconds, or if it illuminateswhile driving, there is a fault in theABS. The brake system remainsoperational but without ABSregulation.

Antilock brake system 3 178.

Gear shiftingR or S with the number of a higher orlower gear is indicated, when up- ordownshifting is recommended for fuelsaving reasons.

Following distanceE indicates the following distancesetting of the alert timing sensitivityfor the forward collision alert usingfilled distance bars.Forward collision alert 3 197.

Lane keep assista illuminates green or yellow, orflashes yellow.

Illuminates greenThe system is switched on and readyto operate.

Illuminates yellowThe system approaches a detectedlane marking without using the turnsignal in that direction.

Flashes yellowThe system recognizes that the laneis departed significantly.Lane keep assist 3 228

Electronic Stability Controlofft illuminates yellow.The system is deactivated.

Electronic Stability Controland Traction Control systemb illuminates or flashes yellow.

IlluminatesA fault in the system is present.Continued driving is possible. Drivingstability, however, may deterioratedepending on road surfaceconditions.


Have the cause of the fault remediedby a workshop.

FlashesThe system is actively engaged.Engine output may be reduced andthe vehicle may be brakedautomatically to a small degree.Electronic Stability Control 3 182,Traction Control system 3 181.

Traction Control system offk illuminates yellow.The system is deactivated.

Engine coolant temperatureW illuminates red.

Illuminates when the engine isrunningStop, switch off engine.

Caution

Coolant temperature too high.

Check coolant level immediately3 241.If there is sufficient coolant, consult aworkshop.

Preheating! illuminates yellow.Preheating of Diesel engine isactivated. Only activates whenoutside temperature is low. Start theengine when control indicatorextinguishes.

AdBlueY flashes yellow.AdBlue level is low. Refill AdBluesoon to avoid prevention of theengine start.AdBlue 3 170.

Tyre pressure monitoringsystemw illuminates or flashes yellow.

IlluminatesTyre pressure loss. Stop immediatelyand check tyre pressure.

FlashesFault in system or tyre withoutpressure sensor mounted (e.g. sparewheel). After 60 to 90 seconds thecontrol indicator illuminatescontinuously. Consult a workshop.

Engine oil pressureI illuminates red.Illuminates when the ignition isswitched on and extinguishes shortlyafter the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine isrunning

Caution

Engine lubrication may beinterrupted. This may result indamage to the engine and/orlocking of the drive wheels.


1. Depress clutch.2. Select neutral gear.3. Move out of the flow of traffic as

quickly as possible withoutimpeding other vehicles.

4. Switch off ignition.

9 Warning

When the engine is off,considerably more force is neededto brake and steer.During an Autostop, the brakeservo unit will still be operational.Do not remove key until vehicle isstationary, otherwise the steeringwheel lock could engageunexpectedly.

Check oil level before seekingassistance of a workshop 3 240.

Low fuelY illuminates or flashes yellow.

IlluminatesLevel in fuel tank is too low.

FlashesFuel used up. Refuel immediately.Never run the tank dry.Refuelling 3 231.Catalytic converter 3 169.Bleeding the diesel fuel system3 244.

Immobiliserd flashes yellow.Fault in the immobiliser system. Theengine cannot be started.Immobiliser 3 35.

Exterior light8 illuminates green.The exterior lights are on 3 134.

High beamC illuminates blue.Illuminated when high beam is on orduring headlight flash 3 135.

High beam assistf illuminates green.The high beam assist is activated,see LED headlights 3 138.

LED headlightsf illuminates or flashes yellow.

IlluminatesFault in the system.Seek the assistance of a workshop.

FlashesSystem is switched to symmetricallow beam.Control indicator f flashes for approx.four seconds after the ignition isswitched on as a reminder forsymmetrical headlight 3 137.

Fog light> illuminates green.The front fog lights are on 3 142.


Rear fog lightø illuminates yellow.The rear fog light is on 3 142.

Cruise controlm illuminates white or green.

Illuminates whiteThe system is on.

Illuminates greenCruise control is active. Set speed isindicated in the Driver InformationCentre.Cruise control 3 186.

Adaptive cruise controlC illuminates in the DriverInformation Centre.

C illuminates whiteThe system is on.

C illuminates greenAdaptive cruise control is active.

Adaptive cruise control 3 189.

Vehicle detected aheadA illuminates green or yellow.

Illuminates greenA vehicle ahead is detected in thesame lane.

Illuminates yellowThe distance to a preceding movingvehicle gets too small or whenapproaching another vehicle toorapidly.Adaptive cruise control 3 189,Forward collision alert 3 197.

Pedestrian detection7 illuminates yellow.A pedestrian ahead is detected.

Speed limiterL illuminates white or green.

Illuminates whiteThe system is on.

Illuminates greenSpeed limiter is active. Set speed isindicated near L symbol.Speed limiter 3 188.

Traffic sign assistantL displays detected traffic signs ascontrol indicator.Traffic sign assistant 3 223.

Door openh illuminates red.A door or the tailgate is open.


Information displaysDriver Information CentreThe Driver Information Centre islocated in the instrument cluster.Depending on the version and theinstrument cluster, the DriverInformation Centre is available asBaselevel display, Midlevel display orUplevel display.Driver Information Centre indicatesdepending on the equipment:● overall and trip odometer● vehicle information and settings● trip/fuel information● driving economic information● driver assistance alerts● warning messages● audio and infotainment

information● phone information● navigation information

Baselevel display

Depending on the version, the menupages of the Baselevel display areselected by pressing:● MENU on the turn signal lever

or● è and å on the steering wheel.

Main menu symbols are indicated inthe top line of the display:● Trip/fuel information, displayed

by ;, see description below.● Vehicle information, displayed

by ?, see description below.● Eco information, displayed by

@, see description below.

Some of the displayed functions differwhen the vehicle is being driven or ata standstill. Some functions are onlyavailable when the vehicle is beingdriven.

Selecting menus and functionsTurn signal lever with MENU buttonThe menus and functions can beselected via the buttons on the turnsignal lever.

Press MENU to switch between themain menus or to return from asubmenu to the next higher menulevel.


Turn the adjuster wheel to select asubmenu of the main menu or to seta numeric value.Press SET/CLR to select and confirma function.Vehicle and service messages arepopped-up in the Driver InformationCentre when required. Confirmmessages by pressing SET/CLR.Vehicle messages 3 123.Steering wheel controlsThe menus and functions can beselected via the buttons on the rightside of the steering wheel.

Press è or é to switch between themain menus or to return from asubmenu to the next higher menulevel.Press å or ä to select a submenu ofthe main menu or to set a numericvalue.Press 9 to select and confirm afunction.Vehicle and service messages arepopped-up in the Driver InformationCentre if required. Confirm messagesby pressing 9. Vehicle messages3 123.

Midlevel displayMenu pages are selected by pressingè and å on the steering wheel.

Main menus are:● Trip/fuel information, displayed

by Info, see description below.● Audio information, displayed by

Audio, see description below.● Phone information, displayed by

Phone, see description below.● Navigation information,

displayed by Navigation, seedescription below.

● Vehicle information, displayed byOptions, see description below.


Some of the displayed functions differwhen the vehicle is being driven or ata standstill and some functions areonly active when the vehicle is beingdriven.

Selecting menus and functionsThe menus and functions can beselected via the buttons on the rightside of the steering wheel.

Press è to open main menu page.Select a main menu page with ä or å.Confirm a main menu page with 9.Once a main menu page is selected,press ä or å to select subpages.

Press é to open a next folder of theselected subpage.Press ä or å to select functions or toset a numeric value, if required.Press 9 to select and confirm afunction.Once a main menu page is selected,this selection remains stored untilanother main menu page is selected.Subpages are changed by pressingå or ä.Vehicle and service messages arepopped-up in the Driver InformationCentre if required. Confirm messagesby pressing 9. Vehicle messages3 123.

Uplevel displayMenu pages are selected by pressingè and å on the steering wheel.

Main menus are:● Trip/fuel information, displayed

by Info, see description below.● Audio information, displayed by

Audio, see description below.● Phone information, displayed by

Phone, see description below.● Navigation information,

displayed by Navigation, seedescription below.

● Vehicle information, displayed byOptions, see description below.


Some of the displayed functions differwhen the vehicle is being driven or ata standstill and some functions areonly active when the vehicle is beingdriven.Uplevel instrument cluster can bedisplayed as Sport mode or Tourmode. See below: Settings Menu,Display Themes.

Selecting menus and functionsThe menus and functions can beselected via the buttons on the rightside of the steering wheel.

Press è to open main menu page.Select a main menu page with ä or å.

Confirm a main menu page with 9.Once a main menu page is selected,press ä or å to select subpages.Press é to open the next folder of theselected subpage.Press ä or å to select functions or toset a numeric value, if required.Press 9 to select and confirm afunction.Once a main menu page is selected,this selection remains stored untilanother main menu page is selected.Subpages are changed by pressingå or ä.Vehicle and service messages arepopped-up in the Driver InformationCentre if required. Confirm messagesby pressing 9. Vehicle messages3 123.

Trip/fuel information menu, ;or InfoThe following list contains all possibleInfo Menu pages. Some may not beavailable for your particular vehicle.Depending on the display somefunctions are symbolised.

Turn the adjuster wheel or press ä orå to select a page:● trip odometer 1 or A

average fuel consumption 1 or Aaverage speed 1 or A

● trip odometer 2 or Baverage fuel consumption 2 or Baverage speed 2 or B

● digital speed● fuel range● instantaneous fuel consumption● remaining oil life● tyre pressure● timer● traffic sign assistant● following distance● blank page

On Baselevel display, the pagesRemaining Oil Life, Tyre Pressure,Traffic Sign Assistant and FollowingDistance are displayed in the Vehicleinformation menu, select ? bypressing MENU.


Trip odometer 1/A or 2/BTrip odometer displays the currentdistance since a certain reset.Trip odometer counts up to a distanceof 9,999 miles then restarts at 0.To reset on Baselevel display, pressSET/CLR for a few seconds, onMidlevel and Uplevel display, pressé and confirm with 9.The information of trip odometer page1 and 2 can be reset separately forodometer, average consumption andaverage speed while the respectivedisplay is active.

Average fuel consumption 1/A or 2/BDisplay of average consumption. Themeasurement can be reset at anytime and starts with a default value.To reset on Baselevel display, pressSET/CLR for a few seconds, onMidlevel and Uplevel display, pressé and confirm with 9.

Average speed 1/A or 2/BDisplay of average speed. Themeasurement can be reset at anytime.

To reset on Baselevel display, pressSET/CLR for a few seconds, onMidlevel and Uplevel display, pressé and confirm with 9.

Digital speedDigital display of the instantaneousspeed.

Fuel rangeRange is calculated from current fueltank level and current consumption.The display shows average values.After refuelling, the range is updatedautomatically after a brief delay.When the fuel level in the tank is low,a message appears on the displayand control indicator Y in the fuelgauge illuminates.When the tank must be refuelledimmediately, a warning messageappears and remains on the display.Additionally, control indicator Y in thefuel gauge flashes 3 110.

Instantaneous fuel consumptionDisplay of the instantaneousconsumption.

Remaining oil lifeIndicates an estimate of the oil'suseful life. The number in % meansthe remaining of current oil life 3 104.

Tire pressureChecks tyre pressure of all wheelsduring driving 3 263.

TimerTo start and stop press 9. To reset,press é and confirm Reset.

Traffic sign assistantDisplays the detected traffic signs forthe current route section 3 223.

Following distanceDisplays the distance in seconds to apreceding moving vehicle 3 200. IfAdaptive cruise control is active thispage shows the following distancesetting instead.

Blank pageA blank page can be selected whenno DIC information is requested.


Eco information menu, @● Top consumers● Economy trend● Eco index

On Mid- and Uplevel display thepages Top Consumers, EconomyTrend and Eco index, are displayed inthe Trip/fuel information menu, selectInfo.

Top ConsumersList of top comfort consumerscurrently switched on is displayed indescending order. Fuel savingpotential is indicated.During sporadic driving conditions,the engine will activate the heatedrear window automatically to increasethe engine load. In this event, theheated rear window is indicated asone of the top consumers, withoutactivation by the driver.

Economy Trend

Displays the average consumptiondevelopment over a distance of31 miles. Filled segments display theconsumption in 3.1 mile steps andshows the effect of topography ordriving behaviour on fuelconsumption.

Economy indexThe current fuel consumption isindicated on an economic scale. Foreconomical driving, adapt drivingstyle to keep the filled segmentswithin the Eco area. The moresegments are filled, the higher thefuel consumption.

Simultaneously the averageconsumption value is indicated.

Audio menuAudio menu enables browsing formusic, selecting from favourites orchanging the audio source.See Infotainment manual.

Phone menuPhone menu enables managing andperforming of phone calls, scrollingthrough contacts or operatinghandsfree phoning.See Infotainment manual.

Navigation menuNavigation menu enables routeguidance.See Infotainment manual.

Vehicle information menu, ? orOptionsThe following list contains all possibleOptions Menu pages. Some may notbe available for your particularvehicle. Depending on the displaysome functions are symbolised.


Turn the adjuster wheel or press ä orå to select a page and follow theinstructions given in the submenus:● units● display themes● info pages● speed warning● tyre loading● pocket gauges● software information

UnitsPress é while units page isdisplayed. Select imperial or metricunits by pressing 9.

Display themesPress é while display themes isdisplayed. Select Sport or Touringmode by pressing 9. Sport modeincludes more vehicle information,Tour mode includes more mediainformation.This setting is only available withUplevel display.

Info pagesPress é while Info pages isdisplayed. A list of all items in the InfoMenu is displayed. Select thefunctions to be displayed in the Infopage by pressing 9. Selected pageshave a 9 in a checkbox. Nonviewable functions have a blankcheckbox. See Info Menu above.

Speed warningThe speed warning display allowsyou to set a speed that you do notwant to exceed.To set the speed warning, press éwhile the page is displayed. Press äor å to adjust the value. Press 9 toset the speed. Once the speed is set,this feature can be turned off bypressing 9 while viewing this page. Ifthe selected speed limit is exceeded,a pop-up warning is displayed with achime.

Tyre loadingThe tyre pressure category accordingto the actual tyre inflation pressurecan be selected 3 263.

Pocket gaugesDepending on vehicle equipment,pocket gauges can be displayed inthe outer left and right edges near thespeedometer. Different gauge typescan be configured.

Press é while pocket gauges isdisplayed. Select left or right pocketby pressing é or è. Choose gaugetype for each pocket by pressing å.Confirm with 9.


Selectable gauge types are:● Battery voltage

Displays the vehicle batteryvoltage (V). During enginerunning voltage can varybetween 12V and 15,5V.Temporary voltage below 12V ispossible when high electricalload is used.

● Oil temperatureDisplays oil temperature indegrees Celsius.

● Oil pressureDisplays oil pressure in kPa.

● Engine boostDisplays boost of the turbocharger in kPa.

Pocket gauges is only available withUplevel display.

Software informationDisplays the open source softwareinformation.

Info displayThe Info-Display is located in theinstrument panel near the instrumentcluster.Depending on the vehicleconfiguration the vehicle has a● 7'' Colour-Info-Display with

touchscreen functionalityor

● 8'' Colour-Info-Display withtouchscreen functionality

The Info displays can indicate:● time 3 91● outside temperature 3 91

● date 3 91● Infotainment system, see

description in the Infotainmentmanual

● climate control settings 3 151● rear view camera 3 220● panoramic view system 3 218● parking assist instructions

3 206● rear cross traffic 3 222● Flex Ride visualisation menu

3 183● navigation, see description in the

Infotainment manual● system messages● settings for vehicle

personalisation 3 125

7'' Colour-Info-Display

Selecting menus and settingsMenus and settings are accessed viathe display.


Press X to switch on the display.Press ; to display the homepage.Touch required menu display iconwith the finger.Touch a respective icon to confirm aselection.Touch 9 to return to the next highermenu level.Press ; to return to the homepage.For further information, seeInfotainment manual.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

8'' Colour-Info-Display

Selecting menus and settingsThere are three options to operate thedisplay:● via buttons below the display● by touching the touchscreen with

the finger● via speech recognition

Button operation

Press X to switch on the display.Press ; to display the homepage.Press BACK to exit a menu withoutchanging a setting.

For further information, seeInfotainment manual.Touchscreen operationDisplay must be switched on bypressing X. Press ; to selecthomepage.Touch required menu display icon orselect a function with the finger.Scroll a longer submenu list with thefinger up or down.Confirm a required function orselection by touching.Touch q on the display to exit amenu without changing a setting.Press ; to return to the homepage.For further information, seeInfotainment manual.Speech recognitionDescription see Infotainment manual.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.


Valet modeSome functions of the DriverInformation Centre and the Info-Display can be limited for somedrivers. The load compartment isbeing locked and cannot be unlocked.For more information, seeInfotainment manual.

Head-up displayThe head-up display shows driverinformation concerning theinstrument cluster onto thewindscreen on the driver's side.The information appears as an imageprojected from a lense in theinstrument panel onto the windscreendirectly ahead in driver's view. Theimage appears focused out towardthe front of the vehicle.Depending on the equipment head-up display can indicate:● general driving information● alerts from driver assistance

systems● automatic transmission selector

lever position

● gear shift indication● audio/phone information● turn-by-turn navigation

information if equipped withnavigation infotainment.

There are three controls above thelight switch to operate the head-updisplay.

Display viewsDifferent views are selectable in thehead-up display by pressing /button. Each press will change thedisplay view.

Speed viewIndicates● speedometer: digital indication of

speed● traffic signs: indication of speed

limits

Performance ViewIndicates● speedometer: digital indication of

speed● tachometer: engine speed in

round per minute● automatic transmission: selector

lever position


● manual/automatic transmission:gear shift indication

● auto stop indication

Audio viewIndicates● speedometer: digital indication of

speed● actual audio playing information

Navigation viewIndicates● speedometer: digital indication of

speed● turn-by-turn navigation

information

Active safety control indicatorsOn all views control indicators offollowing Driver assistance systemsare indicated in the top line of thedisplay● vehicle detected ahead A:

vehicle recognition● lane keep assist a: status and

warning

● adaptive cruise control Õ: setspeed and status

● pedestrian detected ahead 7:pedestrian recognition

Pop-up alertsThe following list contains just anextract of possible alerts. Some maynot be available for your particularvehicle, others can appear dependingon vehicle configuration.Alerts pop-up on each page ifrequired● pedestrian protection alert● forward collision alert● up-/downshift alert● incoming call

Alerts with lower priority can be resetby pressing G, high priority alertsappear as long as danger continues.System messages or vehiclewarnings may require immediatelyaction. Seek the assistance of aworkshop.

Adjust position of head-up displayimage1. Adjust the driver's seat.2. Start the engine.3. Press down or lift up button . to

centre the image. It can only beadjusted up and down, not side toside.

9 Warning

If the head-up display image is toobright or too high in your field ofview, it may obstruct your viewwhen it is dark outside. Be sure tokeep the head-up display imagedim and placed low in your field ofview.

Adjust brightnessThe head-up display image willautomatically dim and brighten tocompensate for outside lighting.Brightness can also be adjustedmanually as needed:Lift up & and hold to brighten thedisplay. Press down and hold to dimthe display.


The image can temporarily light updepending on angel and position ofsunlight.

Switching offHold down & to turn the head-updisplay off.

LanguagePreferred language can be set invehicle personalisation menu 3 125.

UnitsUnits can be changed in the settingsmenu of the Driver Information Centre3 112.

Care of head-up displayClean the inside of the windscreen asneeded to remove any dirt or film thatcould reduce the sharpness or clarityof the head-up image.Clean the head-up display lens in theinstrument panel with a soft clothsprayed with glass cleaner. Wipe thelens gently, then dry it.

System limitationsHead-up display may not operateproperly when:● The lens in the instrument panel

is covered by objects orwindscreen and lens are notclean.

● Display brightness is too dim orbright.

● Image is not adjusted to theproper height.

● The driver wears polarisedsunglasses.

If the head-up image is not correct forother reasons, contact a workshop.The windscreen is part of the head-updisplay system. Windscreenreplacement 3 38.

Vehicle messagesMessages are indicated in the DriverInformation Centre, in some casestogether with a warning and signalbuzzer.

On Baselevel display pressSET/CLR on the turn signal lever toconfirm a message.


On Midlevel and Uplevel display,press 9 to confirm a message.

Vehicle and service messagesThe vehicle messages are displayedas text. Follow the instructions givenin the messages.

Messages in theColour-Info-DisplaySome important messages mayappear additionally in theColour-Info-Display. Press themultifunction knob to confirm amessage. Some messages only pop-up for a few seconds.

Warning chimesWhen starting the engine or whilstdrivingOnly one warning chime will sound ata time.The warning chime regarding notfastened seat belts has priority overany other warning chime.● If seat belt is not fastened.● If a door or the tailgate is not fully

closed when starting off.● If a certain speed is exceeded

with parking brake applied.● If adaptive cruise control

deactivates automatically.● If approaching a vehicle ahead

too closely.● If approaching a pedestrian

ahead too closely.● If a programmed speed or speed

limit is exceeded.● If a warning message appears in

the Driver Information Centre.● If the electronic key is not in the

passenger compartment.

● If the parking assist detects anobject.

● If an unintended lane changeoccurs.

● If the diesel particle filter hasreached the maximum fillinglevel.

When the vehicle is parked and/orthe driver's door is opened● With exterior lights on.● If the trailer hitch is not engaged.

During an Autostop● If the driver's door is opened.● If any condition for an Autostop is

not fulfilled.

Battery voltageWhen the vehicle battery voltage isrunning low, a warning message willappear in the Driver InformationCentre.


1. Switch off any electricalconsumers which are not requiredfor a safe ride, e.g. seat heating,heated rear window or other mainconsumers.

2. Charge the vehicle battery bydriving continuously for a while orby using a charging device.

The warning message will disappearafter the engine has been startedtwice without a voltage drop.If the vehicle battery cannot berecharged, have the cause of the faultremedied by a workshop.

Vehicle personalisationThe vehicle's behaviour can bepersonalised by changing the settingsin the Info-Display.Some of the personal settings fordifferent drivers can be memorisedindividually for each vehicle key.Memorised settings 3 21.Depending on vehicle equipment andcountry-specific regulations some ofthe functions described below maynot be available.Some functions are only displayed oractive when the engine is running.

Personal settings7" Colour-Info-DisplayPress ;, select Settings and thenVehicle on the touch-screen.

In the corresponding submenus thefollowing settings can be changed:

Vehicle● Climate & Air Quality

Auto Fan Max Speed: Modifiesthe level of the cabin airflow of theclimate control in automaticmode.Auto Heated Seats:Automatically activates the seatheating.Auto Defog: Supportswindscreen dehumidification byautomatically selecting thenecessary settings andautomatic air conditioning mode.


Auto Rear Defog: Automaticallyactivates heated rear window.

● Collision / Detection SystemsForward Collision Alert: Activatesor deactivates forward collisionalert.Auto Collision Preparation:Activates or deactivates theautomatic brake functionality ofthe vehicle in the event ofimminent collision danger. Thefollowing is selectable: thesystem will take over brakecontrol, warn by chimes only or isdeactivated completely.Forward Collision System:Changes the settings of forwardcollision alert.Front pedestrian protection:Activates or deactivates andchanges the settings of the frontpedestrian protection.Rear Cross Traffic Alert:Activates or deactivates rearcross traffic alert.Park Assist: Activates ordeactivates the ultrasonicparking assist. Activation is

selectable with or withoutattached trailer coupling.Go Notifier: Activates ordeactivates the reminder to driveoff when the adaptive cruisecontrol holds the vehicle atstandstill.Side Blind Zone Alert: Activatesor deactivates side blind zonealert.

● Comfort and ConvenienceAuto Memory Recall: Changesthe settings to the recall ofmemorised settings for powerseat adjustment.Easy Exit Driver Seat: Activatesor deactivates easy exit functionof the power seat.Chime Volume: Changes thevolume of warning chimes.Reverse Tilt Mirror: Activates ordeactivates the parking assistfunction of the exterior mirrors.Auto Mirror Folding: Activates ordeactivates folding of the exteriormirrors with the remote control.

Personalization By Driver:Activates or deactivates thepersonalisation function.Rain Sense Wipers: Activates ordeactivates automatic wipingwith rain sensor.Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear:Activates or deactivatesautomatic switching on of therear window wiper when reversegear is engaged.

● LightingVehicle Locator Lights: Activatesor deactivates the entry lighting.Exit Lighting: Activates ordeactivates and changes theduration of exit lighting.Left or Right Hand Traffic:Changes between lighting for leftor right-hand traffic.Adaptive Forward Lighting:Changes the settings of thefunctions of the LED headlights.

● Power Door LocksUnlocked Door Anti Lock Out:Activates or deactivates the door


locking function while a door isopen.Auto Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the automatic doorlocking function after switchingon ignition.Delayed Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the delayed doorlocking function. This featuredelays the actual locking of thedoors until all doors are closed.

● Remote Lock, Unlock, StartRemote Unlock Light Feedback:Activates or deactivates thehazard warning flasher feedbackwhilst unlocking.Remote Lock Feedback:Changes what kind of feedbackis given when locking the vehicle.Remote Door Unlock: Changesthe configuration to unlock onlythe driver's door or the wholevehicle whilst unlocking.Relock Remotely UnlockedDoors: Activates or deactivatesthe automatic relock functionafter unlocking without openingthe vehicle.

Remote Window Operation:Activates or deactivates theoperation of power windows withelectronic key.Passive Door Unlock: Changesthe configuration to unlock onlythe driver's door or the wholevehicle whilst unlocking.Passive Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the passive lockingfunction. This feature locks thevehicle automatically afterseveral seconds if all doors havebeen closed and an electronickey has been removed from thevehicle.Remote Left in Vehicle Alert:Activates or deactivates thewarning chime when theelectronic key remains in thevehicle.

Personal settings8" Colour-Info-DisplayPress ; then select the SETTINGSicon.

In the corresponding submenus thefollowing settings can be changed:

Vehicle● Climate and Air Quality

Auto Fan Speed: Modifies thelevel of the cabin airflow of theclimate control in automaticmode.Auto Heated Seats:Automatically activates the seatheating.Auto Demist: Supportswindscreen dehumidification byautomatically selecting thenecessary settings andautomatic air conditioning mode.


Auto Rear Demist: Automaticallyactivates heated rear window.

● Collision / Detection SystemsForward Collision Alert: Activatesor deactivates forward collisionalert.Auto Collision Preparation:Activates or deactivates theautomatic brake functionality ofthe vehicle in the event ofimminent collision danger. Thefollowing is selectable: thesystem will take over brakecontrol, warn by chimes only or isdeactivated completely.Forward Collision System:Changes the settings of forwardcollision alert.Front pedestrian protection:Activates or deactivates andchanges the settings of the frontpedestrian protection.Rear Cross Traffic Alert:Activates or deactivates rearcross traffic alert.Park Assist: Activates ordeactivates the ultrasonicparking assist. Activation is

selectable with or withoutattached trailer coupling.Go Notifier: Activates ordeactivates the reminder functionof the adaptive cruise control.Side Blind Zone Alert: Activatesor deactivates side blind zonealert.

● Comfort and ConvenienceAuto Memory Recall: Changesthe settings to the recall ofmemorised settings for powerseat adjustment.Easy Exit Driver Seat: Activatesor deactivates easy exit functionof the power seat.Chime Volume: Changes thevolume of warning chimes.Reverse Tilt Mirror: Activates ordeactivates the parking assistfunction of the exterior mirrors.Auto Mirror Folding: Activates ordeactivates folding of the exteriormirrors with the remote control.Personalisation by Driver:Activates or deactivates thepersonalisation function.

Rainsense Wipers: Activates ordeactivates automatic wipingwith rain sensor.Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear:Activates or deactivatesautomatic switching on of therear window wiper when reversegear is engaged.

● LightingVehicle Locator Lights: Activatesor deactivates the entry lighting.Exit Lighting: Activates ordeactivates and changes theduration of exit lighting.Left or Right Hand Traffic:Changes between lighting for leftor right-hand traffic.Adaptive Forward Lighting:Changes the settings of thefunctions of the LED headlights.

● Power Door LocksUnlocked Door Anti-Lockout:Activates or deactivates the doorlocking function while a door isopen.Auto Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the automatic door


locking function after switchingon ignition.Delayed Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the delayed doorlocking function. This featuredelays the actual locking of thedoors until all doors are closed.

● Remote Lock, Unlock, StartRemote Unlock Light Feedback:Activates or deactivates thehazard warning flasher feedbackwhilst unlocking.Remote Lock Feedback:Changes what kind of feedbackis given when locking the vehicle.Remote Door Unlock: Changesthe configuration to unlock onlythe driver's door or the wholevehicle whilst unlocking.Relock Remote Unlocked Doors:Activates or deactivates theautomatic relock function afterunlocking without opening thevehicle.Remote Window Operation:Activates or deactivates theoperation of power windows withelectronic key.

Passive Door Unlock: Changesthe configuration to unlock onlythe driver's door or the wholevehicle whilst unlocking.Passive Door Lock: Activates ordeactivates the passive lockingfunction. This feature locks thevehicle automatically afterseveral seconds if all doors havebeen closed and an electronickey has been removed from thevehicle.Remote Left in Vehicle Alert:Activates or deactivates thewarning chime when theelectronic key remains in thevehicle.

Telematics serviceOnStarOnStar is a personal connectivity andservice assistant with integratedWi-Fi hotspot. The OnStar service isavailable 24 hours a day, seven daysa week.NoticeOnStar is not available for allmarkets. For further information,contact your workshop.NoticeIn order to be available andoperational, OnStar needs a validOnStar subscription, functioningvehicle electrics, mobile service andGPS satellite link.

To activate the OnStar services andset up an account, press Z and speakwith an advisor.


Depending on the equipment of thevehicle, the following services areavailable:● Emergency services and support

in the case of a vehiclebreakdown

● Wi-Fi hotspot● Smartphone application● Remote control, e.g. location of

the vehicle, activation of horn andlights, control of central lockingsystem

● Stolen vehicle assistance● Vehicle diagnostics● Destination downloadNoticeThe OnStar module of the vehicle isdeactivated after ten days without anignition cycle. Functions requiring adata connection will be availableagain after switching on the ignition.

OnStar buttons

Privacy buttonPress and hold j until a message isheard to activate or deactivate thetransmission of the vehicle location.Press j to answer a call or to end acall to an advisor.Press j to access the Wi-Fi settings.

Service buttonPress Z to establish a connection toan advisor.

SOS buttonPress [ to establish a priorityemergency connection to a speciallytrained emergency advisor.

Status LEDGreen: The system is ready withactivated transmission of the vehiclelocation.Green flashing: The system is on acall.Red: A problem arose.Off: The system is ready withdeactivated transmission of thevehicle location or the system is instandby mode.Red / green flashing for a short periodof time: The transmission of thevehicle location has beendeactivated.

OnStar services

General servicesIf you need any information e.g.opening hours, points of interest anddestinations or if you need anysupport e.g. in the case of a vehicle


breakdown, a flat tyre and empty fueltank, press Z to establish aconnection to an advisor.

Emergency servicesIn the case of an emergency situation,press [ and talk to an advisor. Theadvisor then contacts emergency orassistance service providers anddirects them to your vehicle.In the case of an accident withactivation of airbags or belttensioners, an automatic emergencycall is established. The advisor isimmediately connected to yourvehicle to see whether help isneeded.NoticeEstablishing an emergency call maynot be possible in areas withoutsufficient network availability or dueto hardware damage during anaccident.

Wi-Fi hotspotThe Wi-Fi hotspot of the vehicleprovides internet connectivity with amaximum speed of 4G/LTE.

NoticeThe Wi-Fi hotspot functionality is notavailable for all markets.

Up to seven devices may beconnected.To connect a mobile device with theWi-Fi hotspot:1. Press j and then select Wi-Fi

settings on the Info-Display. Thesettings displayed include the Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password and connection type.

2. Start a Wi-Fi network search onyour mobile device.

3. Select your vehicle hotspot(SSID) when listed.

4. When prompted, enter thepassword on your mobile device.

NoticeTo change the SSID or password,press Z and talk to an advisor or login to your account.

To switch off the Wi-Fi hotspotfunctionality, press Z to call anadvisor.

Smartphone appWith the My Vauxhall smartphoneapp, some vehicle functions can beoperated remotely.The following functions are available:● Lock or unlock vehicle.● Honk horn or flash lights.● Check fuel level, engine oil life

and tyre pressure (only with tyrepressure monitoring system).

● Send navigation destination tothe vehicle, if equipped with abuilt-in navigation system.

● Locate vehicle on a map.● Manage Wi-Fi settings.

To operate these functions, downloadthe app from App Store® orGoogle Play™ Store.

Remote controlIf desired, use any phone to call anadvisor, who can remotely operatespecific vehicle functions. Find therespective OnStar phone number onour country-specific website.


The following functions are available:● Lock or unlock vehicle.● Provide information on the

vehicle location.● Honk horn or flash lights.

Stolen vehicle assistanceIf the vehicle is stolen, report the theftto the authorities and request OnStarstolen vehicle assistance. Use anyphone to call an advisor. Find therespective OnStar phone number onour country-specific website.OnStar can provide support inlocating and recovering the vehicle.Theft alertWhen the anti-theft alarm system istriggered, a notification is sent toOnStar. You are then informed aboutthis event by text message or email.Restart preventionBy sending remote signals, OnStarcan prevent the vehicle fromrestarting once it has been turned off.

On-demand diagnosticsAt any time e.g. if the vehicle displaysa vehicle message, press Z tocontact an advisor and ask tocomplete a real-time diagnostic checkto directly determine the issue.Depending on the results, the advisorwill provide further support.

Diagnostic reportThe vehicle automatically transmitsdiagnostic data to OnStar whichsends a monthly email report to youand your preferred workshop.NoticeThe workshop notification functioncan be disabled in your account.

The report contains the status of keyoperating systems of the vehicle likeengine, transmission, airbags, ABS,and other major systems. It alsoprovides information on possiblemaintenance items and tyre pressure(only with tyre pressure monitoringsystem).To look at the information in greaterdetail, select the link within the emailand log in to your account.

Destination downloadA desired destination can be directlydownloaded to the navigation system.Press Z to call an advisor anddescribe the destination or point ofinterest.The advisor can look up any addressor point of interest and directly sendthe destination to the built-innavigation system.

OnStar settings

OnStar PINTo have full access to all OnStarservices, a four-digit PIN is required.The PIN has to be personalised whenfirst talking to an advisor.To change the PIN, press Z to call anadvisor.

Account dataAn OnStar subscriber has an accountwhere all the data is stored. Torequest a change of the accountinformation, press Z and talk to anadvisor or log in to your account.


If the OnStar service is used onanother vehicle, press Z and requestthat the account be transferred to thenew vehicle.NoticeIn any case, if the vehicle is disposedof, sold or otherwise transferred,immediately inform OnStar aboutthe changes and terminate theOnStar service on this vehicle.

Vehicle locationThe vehicle location is transmitted toOnStar when service is requested ortriggered. A message on the Info-Display informs about thistransmission.To activate or deactivate thetransmission of the vehicle location,press and hold j until an audiomessage is heard.The deactivation is indicated by thestatus light flashing red and green fora short period of time and each timethe vehicle is started.NoticeIf the transmission of the vehiclelocation is deactivated, someservices are no longer available.

NoticeThe vehicle location always remainsaccessible to OnStar in the case ofan emergency.

Find the privacy policy in youraccount.

Software updatesOnStar may remotely carry outsoftware updates without furthernotice or consent. These updates areto enhance or maintain safety andsecurity or the operation of thevehicle.These updates may concern privacyissues. Find the privacy policy in youraccount.

134 Lighting

Lighting

Exterior lighting .......................... 134Light switch .............................. 134Automatic light control ............. 135High beam ............................... 135High beam assist ..................... 135Headlight flash ......................... 137Headlight range adjustment .... 137Headlights when drivingabroad .................................... 137

Daytime running lights ............. 138LED headlights ........................ 138Hazard warning flashers .......... 141Turn and lane-change signals . 141Front fog lights ......................... 142Rear fog light ........................... 142Parking lights ........................... 142Reversing lights ....................... 143Misted light covers ................... 143

Interior lighting ........................... 143Instrument panel illuminationcontrol ..................................... 143

Interior lights ............................ 143Reading lights .......................... 144Sunvisor lights ......................... 145

Lighting features ........................ 145Centre console lighting ............ 145Entry lighting ............................ 145Exit lighting .............................. 145Battery discharge protection .... 146

Exterior lightingLight switch

Turn light switch:AUTO : automatic light control

switches automaticallybetween daytime runninglight and headlight

8 : sidelights9 : headlights

When switching on the ignition,automatic light control is active.Control indicator 8 3 110.

Lighting 135

Tail lightsTail lights are illuminated togetherwith low/high beam and sidelights.

Automatic light control

When the automatic light controlfunction is switched on and theengine is running, the systemswitches between daytime runninglights and headlights automaticallydepending on the external lightingconditions and information given bythe wiper system.Daytime running light 3 138.

Automatic headlight activationDuring poor lighting conditionsheadlights are switched on.Additionally, headlights are switchedon if the windscreen wipers havebeen activated for several wipes.LED headlights 3 138.

Tunnel detectionWhen a tunnel is entered, headlightsare switched on immediately.

High beam

Push lever to switch from low to highbeam.

Pull lever to deactivate high beam.High beam assist 3 138.

High beam assistDescription for version with halogenheadlights. High beam assist withLED headlights 3 138.This feature allows the high beam tofunction as the main driving light atnight and when vehicle speed isfaster than 25 mph.It switches automatically to low beamwhen:● A sensor detects the lights of

oncoming or preceding vehicles.● Driving in urban areas.● The vehicle speed is slower than

12 mph.● It is foggy or snowy.● Front or rear fog lights are

switched on.If there are no restrictions detected,the system switches back to highbeam.

136 Lighting

ActivationTurn signal lever with MENU button

The high beam assist is activated bypushing the turn signal lever twice ata speed above 25 mph.

Turn signal lever with f button

Activate high beam assist by pressingf once.The green control indicator filluminates continuously when theassist is activated, the blue one 7illuminates when high beam is on.Control indicator f 3 110.

DeactivationWith high beam on, pull the turn signallever once to deactivate high beamassist. If a headlight flash is activatedwhen the high beam is off, the highbeam assist will remain activated.

Pushing the indicator lever to activatemanual high beam will deactivatehigh beam assist. It is alsodeactivated when fog lights areswitched on.Turn signal lever with MENU button:when high beam is off, push indicatorlever twice to deactivate high beamassist.Turn signal lever with f button:press f once to deactivate highbeam assist.The latest setting of the high beamassist is being stored and remains setwhen the ignition is switched onagain.

Lighting 137

Headlight flash

To activate the headlight flash, pulllever.Pulling lever deactivates high beam.LED headlights 3 138.

Headlight range adjustmentManual headlight rangeadjustment

To adapt headlight range to thevehicle load to prevent dazzling: pushand then turn ? to required position.0 : front seats occupied1 : all seats occupied2 : all seats occupied and load

compartment laden3 : driver's seat occupied and load

compartment laden

Dynamic automatic headlightlevelling 3 138.

Headlights when drivingabroadThe asymmetrical headlight beamextends visibility at the edge of theroad at the passenger side.However, when driving in countrieswhere traffic drives on the oppositeside of the road, adjust the headlightsto prevent dazzling of oncomingtraffic.

Vehicles with halogen headlightsystemThe headlights do not have to beadjusted.

Vehicles with LED headlightHeadlights can be set for driving onthe opposite side of the road in thevehicle personalisation menu via theInfo-Display.Select the relevant setting in Settings,I Vehicle.Info-Display 3 119.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

138 Lighting

Every time the ignition is switched on,f flashes for approx. four seconds asa reminder.To deactivate, use the sameprocedure as described above. f willnot flash when function isdeactivated.Control indicator f 3 110.

Daytime running lightsDaytime running lights increasevisibility of the vehicle during daylight.They are switched on automaticallyduring daytime when engine isrunning.The system switches betweendaytime running lights and headlightsautomatically, depending on thelighting conditions. Automatic lightcontrol 3 135.

LED headlightsLED headlight system contains avariety of particular LEDs in eachheadlight which enables the control ofdifferent lighting programs.

Light distribution and intensity of lightare variably triggered depending onthe lighting conditions, road type anddriving situation. The vehicle adaptsthe headlights automatically to thesituation to enable optimal lightperformance for the driver.Some functions of the LED headlightscan be deactivated or activated in thevehicle personalisation menu. Selectthe relevant setting in Settings, IVehicle in the Info-Display. Vehiclepersonalisation 3 125.High beam assist can not bedeactivated.The following lighting functions areavailable with light switch in positionAUTO or 9.

Town light

Activated automatically at a speed upto approx. 34 mph and in situationswith exterior ambient light. The light iswide and symmetrical. A specialbeam pattern is designed to avoidglare for other road users.

Country light

Activated automatically at a speedabove approx. 34 mph when drivingin rural areas. The illumination of thecurrent lane and the side of the roadis improved. Oncoming andpreceding vehicles are not dazzled.

Curve light

Lighting 139

Particular LEDs, based on steeringangle and speed, are additionallytriggered to improve lighting incurves. This function is activated atspeeds from 25 mph to 43 mph andreacts to steering angle.

Corner light

When turning off, depending on thesteering angle and the turn signallight, particular LEDs are triggeredwhich illuminate the direction oftravel. It is activated up to a speed of25 mph.

Reverse parking functionTo assist driver's orientation whenparking, both corner lights andreversing light illuminate whenheadlights are on and reverse gear isengaged. They remain illuminated fora short time after disengaging reversegear or until driving faster than4 mph in a forward gear.

High beam assistThis feature allows the high beam tofunction as main driving light at night.The camera in the windscreendetects the lights of oncoming orpreceding vehicles. Each LED onright or left side can be triggered orfaded out particularly according to thetraffic situation. This gives the bestlight distribution without dazzlingother road users. Once activated,high beam assist remains active andswitches high beam on and offdepending on surroundingconditions. The latest setting of thehigh beam assist will remain after theignition is switched on again.

High beam assist includes a specialmotorway mode. When driving fasterthan 71 mph on motorways, the lightbeam becomes smaller to avoiddazzling of oncoming traffic. Whenfollowing vehicles ahead or passing,mirror dazzling for these vehicles isreduced.

ActivationIndicator lever with MENU button

140 Lighting

Activate high beam assist by pushingthe indicator lever twice. High beam isswitched on automatically at a speedabove 31 mph. High beam is switchedoff at a speed below 22 mph, but highbeam assist remains active.Indicator lever with f button

Activate high beam assist by pressingf once. High beam is switched onautomatically at a speed above31 mph. High beam is switched off ata speed below 22 mph, but high beamassist remains active.

The green control indicator filluminates continuously when thehigh beam assist is activated, the blueone 7 illuminates when high beam ison.Control indicator f 3 110, 73 110.Pressing indicator lever onceswitches on manual high beamwithout high beam assist.High beam assist switchesautomatically to low beam when:● Driving in urban areas.● Camera detects heavy fog.● Front or rear fog lights are

switched on.If there are no restrictions detected,the system switches back to highbeam.

DeactivationIndicator lever with or without MENUbuttonIf high beam assist is active and highbeam is on, pull indicator lever onceto deactivate high beam assist.

If high beam assist is active and highbeam is off, push indicator lever twiceto deactivate high beam assist.Pushing the indicator lever to activatemanual high beam will alsodeactivate high beam assist.Indicator lever with f buttonIf high beam assist is active and highbeam is on, press f once or pullindicator lever once to deactivate highbeam assist.If high beam assist is active and highbeam is off, press f once todeactivate high beam assist.Pushing the indicator lever to activatemanual high beam will alsodeactivate high beam assist.Headlight flash in conjunction withhigh beam assistHeadlight flash by pulling indicatorlever once will not deactivate highbeam assist when high beam is off.Headlight flash by pulling indicatorlever once deactivates high beamassist when high beam is on.

Lighting 141

Dynamic automatic headlightlevellingTo prevent oncoming traffic frombeing dazzled, headlight levelling isautomatically adjusted based oninclination information measured byfront and rear axle, acceleration ordeceleration and vehicle speed.

Headlights when driving abroad3 137.

Fault in LED headlight systemWhen the system detects a failure inthe LED headlight system, it selects apreset position to avoid dazzling ofoncoming traffic. A warning isdisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre.

Hazard warning flashersOperated by pressing ¨.

In the event of an accident with airbagdeployment, the hazard warningflashers are activated automatically.

Turn and lane-changesignals

lever up : right turn signallever down : left turn signal

A resistance point can be felt bymoving the lever.Constant flashing is activated whenthe lever is being moved beyond theresistance point. It is deactivatedwhen the steering wheel is moved inthe opposite direction or lever ismanually moved back to its neutralposition.

142 Lighting

Activate temporary flashing byholding the lever just before theresistance point. Turning lights willflash until lever is being released.To activate three flashes, tap thelever briefly without passing theresistance point. With a trailerconnected, the turn signal flashessix times and tone frequencychanges.

Front fog lights

Operated by pressing >.Light switch in position AUTO:switching on front fog lights will switchheadlights on automatically.

Rear fog light

Operated by pressing ø.Light switch in position AUTO:switching on rear fog light will switchheadlights on automatically.Light switch in position 8: rear foglight can only be switched on withfront fog lights.The vehicle rear fog light isdeactivated when towing a trailer or aplug is connected with the socket, e.g. when a bicycle carrier is used.

Parking lights

When the vehicle is parked, theparking lights on one side can beactivated:1. Switch off ignition.2. Move turn signal lever all the way

up (right parking lights) or down(left parking lights).

Confirmed by a signal and thecorresponding turn signal controlindicator.

Lighting 143

Reversing lightsThe reversing light comes on whenthe ignition is on and reverse gear isselected.

Misted light coversThe inside of the light housing maymist up briefly in poor, wet and coldweather conditions, in heavy rain orafter washing. The mist disappearsquickly by itself; to help switch on theheadlights.

Interior lightingInstrument panelillumination control

Brightness of the following lights canbe adjusted in position AUTO whenthe light sensor detects nightconditions, or in position 8 or 9.● instrument panel illumination● Info-Display● illuminated switches and

operation elementsPush and then turn A until the desiredbrightness is obtained.

Interior lightsDuring entry and exit of the vehicle,the front and rear courtesy lightsautomatically switch on and then offafter a delay.NoticeIn the event of an accident withairbag deployment the courtesylights are turned on automatically.

144 Lighting

Front courtesy light

press-

: interior lights areswitched on or offmanually

press%

: interior lights are notautomatically switchedon when a door isopened. Deactivation isindicated by a LED in theswitch.

Rear courtesy lightsIlluminate in conjunction with the frontcourtesy light.

Reading lights

Operated by pressing the respectivereading light.

Lighting 145

Illustration shows rear reading light.

Sunvisor lightsIlluminates when the cover is opened.

Lighting featuresCentre console lightingSpotlight incorporated in the interiorlighting comes on when headlightsare switched on.

Entry lightingWelcome lightingThe following lights are switched onfor a short time by unlocking thevehicle with the electronic key:● headlights● puddle lights in both outside

mirrors● tail lights● number plate lights● instrument panel light● interior lights

Some functions are only operablewhen it is dark outside to facilitatelocating the vehicle.The lighting switches off immediatelywhen the ignition is switched on.Starting off 3 17.

This function can be activated ordeactivated in the vehiclepersonalisation.Select the relevant setting in Settings,I Vehicle in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 119.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.The settings can be saved for the keybeing used 3 21.The following lights will additionallyswitch on when the driver's door isopened:● illumination of some switches● Driver Information Centre● door pocket lights

Exit lightingThe following lights will switch onwhen the ignition is switched off:● interior lights● instrument panel light● puddle lights in both outside

mirrors

146 Lighting

They will switch off automatically aftera delay. This function works only inthe dark. Theatre lighting is activatedif the driver's door is opened duringthis time.

Path lightingHeadlights, tail lights and numberplate lights illuminate the surroundingarea for an adjustable time afterleaving the vehicle.

ActivatingHalogen headlights

1. Switch off the ignition.2. Open the driver's door.

3. Pull the turn signal lever.4. Close the driver's door.

If the driver's door is not closed, thelights switch off after two minutes.Exit lighting is switched offimmediately if the turn signal lever ispulled while the driver's door is open.LED headlightsPath lighting is activated, when theignistion is switched off and thedriver's door is opened.This function can be activated ordeactivated in the vehiclepersonalisation.Select the relevant setting in Settings,I Vehicle in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 119.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.The settings can be saved for the keybeing used 3 21.

Battery discharge protectionVehicle battery state of chargefunctionThe function guarantees longestvehicle battery life via a generatorwith controllable power output andoptimised power distribution.To prevent discharge of the vehiclebattery when driving, the followingsystems are reduced automatically intwo stages and finally switched off:● auxiliary heater● heated rear and front window● heated steering wheel● heated mirrors● heated seats● fan

In the second stage, a messagewhich confirms the activation of thevehicle battery discharge protectionwill be displayed in the DriverInformation Centre.

Lighting 147

Switching off electric lightsTo prevent discharge of the vehiclebattery when the ignition is switchedoff, some interior lights are switchedoff automatically after some time.

148 Climate control

Climate control

Climate control systems ............. 148Air conditioning system ........... 148Electronic climate controlsystem .................................... 151

Auxiliary heater ........................ 157Air vents ..................................... 157

Adjustable air vents ................. 157Fixed air vents ......................... 158

Maintenance .............................. 158Air intake ................................. 158Air conditioning regularoperation ................................ 159

Service .................................... 159

Climate control systemsAir conditioning system

Illustration shows functions whichmay not be available for yourparticular vehicle.Controls for:● Fan speed E● Temperature TEMP● Air distribution w, x and y● Air conditioning A/C● Demisting and defrosting á● Air recirculation n● External air 5

● Heated rear window and exteriormirrors b

● Heated windscreen ,● Heated seats ß

Some changes of settings areindicated briefly in the Info-Display.Activated functions are indicated bythe LED in the respective button.

Fan speed EAdjust the air flow by turning Z to thedesired speed.clockwise : increaseanti-clockwise : decrease

Temperature TEMPAdjust the temperature by turningTEMP to the desired temperature.red area : warmerblue area : colder

Heating will not be fully effective untilthe engine has reached normaloperating temperature.

Climate control 149

Air distribution w x yPress:w : to windscreen and front door

windowsx : to head area and rear seats via

adjustable air ventsy : to front and rear foot well and

windscreen

Combinations are possible.

Air conditioning A/C

Press A/C to switch on cooling.Activation is indicated by the LED inthe button. Cooling is only functionalwhen the engine is running andclimate control fan is switched on.Press A/C again to switch off cooling.The air conditioning system cools anddehumidifies (dries) as soon as theoutside temperature is slightly abovethe freezing point. Thereforecondensation may form and drip fromunder the vehicle.If no cooling or drying is required,switch off the cooling system for fuelsaving reasons.Activated cooling may inhibitAutostops. Stop-start system 3 165.

Demisting and defrosting thewindows á

● Press á: fan automaticallyswitches to higher speed, the airdistribution is directed towardsthe windscreen.

● Set temperature controllerTEMP to warmest level.

● Switch on air conditioning A/C ifrequired.

● Switch on heated rear window b.● Switch on heated

windscreen , if available.

150 Climate control

● Open side air vents as requiredand direct them towards the doorwindows.

● For maximum demisting anddefrosting set fan speed tohighest level.

NoticeIf á is pressed while the engine isrunning, an Autostop will be inhibiteduntil á is pressed again.If á is pressed while the engine is inan Autostop, the engine will restartautomatically.


Air recirculation system n

Press n to activate air recirculationmode, LED is indicated.Select air recirculation to assist incooling the interior or in blockingoutside odours or exhaust.Press n again to deactivate airrecirculation mode.On version without heatedwindscreen, press 5 to deactivateair recirculation. External air mode isactivated.

9 Warning

The exchange of fresh air isreduced in air recirculation mode.In operation without cooling the airhumidity increases, so thewindows may mist up from inside.The quality of the passengercompartment air deteriorates,which may cause the vehicleoccupants to feel drowsy.

In warm and very humid ambient airconditions, the windscreen may mistup from outside when cold air is

directed towards it. If windscreenmists up from outside, activatewindscreen wiper and deactivate w.

External air mode 5

Press 5 to activate external airmode, LED is indicated.Press n to activate air recirculationmode. External air mode isdeactivated.

Climate control 151

Maximum cooling

Briefly open the windows so that hotair can disperse quickly.● Switch on air conditioning A/C.● Press n for air recirculation

system on.● Press x for air distribution.● Set temperature control TEMP to

coldest level.● Set fan speed E to highest level.● Open all vents.

Version with heatedwindscreen ,

If the vehicle is equipped with heatedwindscreen, button 5 is replaced bybutton ,.

Heated rear window and exteriormirrors b3 40

Heated windscreen ,3 41.

Heated seats q3 52.

Electronic climate controlsystemThe dual zone climate control allowsdifferent temperatures for driver sideand front passenger side.In automatic mode, temperature, fanspeed and air distribution areregulated automatically.

Illustration shows functions whichmay not be available for yourparticular vehicle.

152 Climate control

Controls for:● Control dial for temperature on

driver side● Control dial for temperature on

passenger side● CLIMATE enters the Climate

setting menu in the Info-Display● Fan speed increase ( and

decrease )● Climate control ON/OFF or â● Automatic mode AUTO● Manual air recirculation n● Demisting and defrosting à● Heated rear window and exterior

mirrors b● Heated windscreen ,● Heated seats q● Ventilated seats r

Activated functions are indicated bythe LED in the respective control.The electronic climate control systemis only fully operational when theengine is running.

Climate setting menu CLIMATE

Settings for● Air distribution w, x, y● Fan speed E● Temperature for driver and

passenger side 23°/25°● Dual zone temperature

synchronisation SYNC● Air conditioning ON/OFF

can be triggered manually in theClimate setting menu. PressCLIMATE to enter the menu andfollow the touch buttons.

Climate setting menu can also bedisplayed by touching button ã in theInfo-Display 3 119.Changes of settings via the controlsare indicated as pop up in theInfo-Display.

Automatic mode AUTO

Basic settings for automatic controlwith maximum comfort:● Press AUTO, the air distribution

and fan speed are regulatedautomatically.

● Open all air vents to allowoptimised air distribution inautomatic mode.

Climate control 153

● Cooling must be activated in theclimate setting menu for optimalcooling and demisting. PressClimate to enter the menu andfollow the touch button to switchon air conditioning A/C.

● Set the preselectedtemperatures separately fordriver and front passenger usingthe left and right control dials.Recommended temperature is22 °C. Temperature is indicatedbriefly in displays beside thecontrol dials and in the climatesetting menu.

● Air recirculation mode n shouldbe deactivated. Whendeactivated the LED in the buttonis not illuminated.

Manual settingsClimate control system settings canbe changed by activating thefollowing functions as describedbelow.

Fan speed ( )

Press upper button ( to increase orlower button ) to decrease fan speed.The fan speed is indicated as pop-upin the Info Display. Fan speed canalso be changed by touch buttons inthe climate setting display. PressClimate to enter the menu.Pressing the lower button ) for longer:fan and cooling are switched off.To return to automatic mode pressAUTO.

Air distribution w, x, y

Press Climate to enter the menu.Touch:w : to windscreen and front door

windowsx : to head area and rear seats via

adjustable air ventsy : to front and rear foot well and

windscreen

To return to automatic air distributionpress AUTO.

154 Climate control

Temperature preselection

Set the preselected temperaturesseparately for driver and frontpassenger to the desired value usingthe left and right control dials. Theknob on the passenger side changesthe temperature for the passengerside. The knob on the driver's sidechanges the temperature for thedriver's side or for both sidesdepending on activation ofsynchronisation SYNC.Recommended temperature is 22 °C.Temperature is indicated in displaysbeside the control dials and as pop-up in the Info-Display.

If the minimum temperature Lo is set,the climate control system runs atmaximum cooling, if cooling A/C isswitched on.If the maximum temperature Hi is set,the climate control system runs atmaximum heating.NoticeIf A/C is switched on, reducing theset cabin temperature can cause theengine to restart from an Autostop orinhibit an Autostop.


Dual zone temperaturesynchronisation SYNCPress Climate to enter the menu.Touch SYNC to link passenger sidetemperature setting to the driver side.When passenger side control dial willbe adjusted, synchronisation isdeactivated.

Air conditioning A/C

Press Climate to enter the menu andfollow the touch button to switch airconditioning A/C ON or A/C OFF.Cooling is only functional when theengine is running and climate controlfan is switched on.The air conditioning system cools anddehumidifies (dries) when outsidetemperature is above a specific level.Therefore condensation may formand drip from under the vehicle.If no cooling or drying is required,switch off the cooling system for fuelsaving reasons.

Climate control 155

Manual air recirculation n

Press n to activate the airrecirculation mode. The LED in thebutton illuminates to indicateactivation.Press n again to deactivaterecirculation mode.

9 Warning

The exchange of fresh air isreduced in air recirculation mode.In operation without cooling the airhumidity increases, so thewindows may mist up from inside.

The quality of the passengercompartment air deteriorates,which may cause the vehicleoccupants to feel drowsy.

In warm and very humid ambient airconditions, the windscreen may mistup from outside, when cold air isdirected towards it. If windscreenmists up from outside, activatewindscreen wiper and deactivate w.

Automatic air recirculationAn air humidity sensor switchesautomatically to external air if internalair humidity is too high.

Demisting and defrosting thewindows à

● Press à. The LED in the buttonilluminates to indicate activation.

● Temperature and air distributionare set automatically and the fanruns at high speed.

● Switch on air conditioningA/C ON in Climate setting menuby pressing Climate, if required.

● Switch on heated rear window b.

156 Climate control

● Switch on heatedwindscreen , if available.

● To return to previous mode pressà again, to return to automaticmode press AUTO.

NoticeIf à is pressed while the engine isrunning, an Autostop will be inhibiteduntil à is pressed again.If à is pressed while the engine is inan Autostop, the engine will restartautomatically.


Deactivation or activation ofElectronic climate control systemON/OFF

Cooling, fan and automatic mode canbe switched off by pressing ON/OFF.When the system is deactivated, theLED in the button ON/OFF is notilluminated.Activation by pressing ON/OFF againor AUTO. The LED in the buttonilluminates to indicate activation.

Version with heatedwindscreen ,

If the vehicle is equipped with heatedwindscreen, button ON/OFF isreplaced by button ,.Climate control system will thenswitched off by button â. Switch onby pressing (.

Climate control 157

Basic settingsFollowing settings can be changed inthe Personalisation menu in theInfo-Display:● fan speed regulation in automatic

mode.● settings of automatic rear window

heating.● settings of automatic windscreen

dehumidification● settings of automatic seat

heatingVehicle personalisation 3 125.

Heated rear window and exteriormirrors b3 40

Heated windscreen ,3 41.

Heated seats q3 52.

Ventilated seats r3 52

Auxiliary heaterAir heaterQuickheat is an electric auxiliary airheater which automatically warms upthe passenger compartment morequickly.

Air ventsAdjustable air ventsAt least one air vent must be openwhile cooling is on.

Illustration shows centre air vents ininstrument panel.

158 Climate control

Illustration shows outer air vents ininstrument panel.

Illustration shows air vents for rearpassenger.

Direct the flow of air by tilting andswivelling the slats.To close the vent, swivel the slatsideways.

9 Warning

Do not attach any objects to theslats of the air vents. Risk ofdamage and injury in case of anaccident.

Fixed air ventsAdditional air vents are locatedbeneath the windscreen and doorwindows and in the foot wells.

MaintenanceAir intake

The air intake in front of thewindscreen in the enginecompartment must be kept clear toallow air intake. Remove any leaves,dirt or snow.

Cabin air filterChange filter regulary for maximumeffect.

Climate control 159

Air conditioning regularoperationIn order to ensure continuouslyefficient performance, cooling mustbe operated for a few minutes once amonth, irrespective of the weatherand time of year. Operation withcooling is not possible when theoutside temperature is too low.

ServiceFor optimal cooling performance, it isrecommended to annually check theclimate control system, startingthree years after initial vehicleregistration, including:● functionality and pressure test● heating functionality● leakage check● check of drive belts● cleaning of condenser and

evaporator drainage● performance check● cabin air filter check

160 Driving and operating

Driving andoperating

Driving hints ............................... 161Control of the vehicle ............... 161Steering ................................... 161

Starting and operating ............... 161New vehicle running-in ............ 161Power button ........................... 162Retained power off .................. 163Starting the engine .................. 163Overrun cut-off ........................ 164Stop-start system .................... 165Parking .................................... 167

Engine exhaust .......................... 168Diesel particle filter .................. 168Catalytic converter ................... 169AdBlue ..................................... 170

Automatic transmission .............. 173Manual transmission .................. 177Drive systems ............................ 178

All-wheel drive ......................... 178Brakes ........................................ 178

Antilock brake system ............. 178Parking brake .......................... 179

Brake assist ............................. 180Hill start assist ......................... 181

Ride control systems ................. 181Traction Control system .......... 181Electronic Stability Control ...... 182Interactive driving system ........ 183

Driver assistance systems ......... 186Cruise control .......................... 186Speed limiter ........................... 188Adaptive cruise control ............ 189Forward collision alert ............. 197Following distance indication ... 200Active emergency braking ....... 201Front pedestrian protection ..... 204Parking assist .......................... 206Side blind zone assistant ......... 214Lane change alert .................... 216Panoramic view system ........... 218Rear view camera ................... 220Rear cross traffic alert ............. 222Traffic sign assistant ................ 223Lane keep assist ..................... 228

Fuel ............................................ 230Fuel for petrol engines ............. 230Fuel for diesel engines ............ 231Refuelling ................................ 231

Trailer hitch ................................ 233General information ................. 233

Driving characteristics andtowing tips .............................. 234

Trailer towing ........................... 234Towing equipment ................... 235Trailer stability assist ............... 236

Driving and operating 161

Driving hintsControl of the vehicleNever coast with engine notrunningMany systems will not function in thissituation (e.g. brake servo unit, powersteering). Driving in this manner is adanger to yourself and others.All systems function during anAutostop.Stop-start system 3 165.

Idle boostIf charging of the vehicle battery isrequired due to battery condition, thepower output of the generator mustbe increased. This will be achieved byan idle boost which may be audible.A message appears in the DriverInformation Centre.

PedalsTo ensure the pedal travel isuninhibited, there must be no mats inthe area of the pedals.

Use only floor mats, which fit properlyand are fixed by the retainers on thedriver side.

SteeringIf power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or due to asystem malfunction, the vehicle canbe steered but may require increasedeffort.

Starting and operatingNew vehicle running-inDo not brake unnecessarily hard forthe first few journeys.During the first drive, smoke mayoccur because of wax and oilevaporating off the exhaust system.Park the vehicle in the open for awhile after the first drive and avoidinhaling the fumes.During the running-in period, fuel andengine oil consumption may behigher.Additionally, the cleaning process ofthe diesel particle filter may takeplace more often.Diesel particle filter 3 168.Autostop may be inhibited to allow forcharging of the vehicle battery.


Power button

Electronic key must be inside thevehicle.Accessory power modePress Engine Start/Stop once withoutoperating clutch or brake pedal. Theyellow LED in the button illuminates.Steering wheel lock is released andsome electrical functions areoperable, ignition is off.Ignition on power modePress and hold Engine Start/Stop forsix seconds without operating clutchor brake pedal. The green LED in thebutton illuminates, diesel engine is

preheating. Control indicatorsilluminate and most electricalfunctions are operable.Engine startPress Engine Start/Stop briefly while:● manual transmission: operating

clutch pedal,● automatic transmission:

operating brake pedal withselector lever in P or N.

Starting the engine 3 163.Ignition offPress Engine Start/Stop briefly whenAutostop is activated or when engineis running and vehicle is stationary.Automatic transmission: apply theparking brake and engage P.Press Engine Start/Stop brieflywithout operating clutch or brakepedal when in ignition on powermode.Some functions remain active untildriver's door is opened, provided theignition was on previously.

Emergency engine shut off duringdrivingPress Engine Start/Stop for morethan two seconds or press twicebriefly within five seconds 3 163.

Steering wheel lockThe steering wheel lock activatesautomatically when:● The vehicle is stationary.● The ignition has been switched

off.● The driver's door is opened.

To release steering wheel lock, openand close driver's door and switch onaccessory mode or start the enginedirectly.

9 Warning

If the vehicle battery is discharged,the vehicle must not be towed,tow-started or jump-started as thesteering wheel lock cannot bedisengaged.


Operation on vehicles withelectronic key system in case offailureIf either the electronic key fails or thebattery of the electronic key is weak,the Driver Information Centre maydisplay No Remote Detected orReplace Battery in Remote Key whenyou try to start the vehicle.

Open the cover of the centre consolein front of the gear shift lever. Placethe electronic key across with buttonsupside in the transmitter pocketbeside the power outlet, as shown inthe illustration.

Other objects, e.g. other keys,transponder, tags, coins etc. must beremoved from the pocket.Depress the clutch pedal (manualtransmission) or the brake pedal(automatic transmission) and pressEngine Start/Stop.To switch off the engine, pressEngine Start/Stop again. Remove theelectronic key from the transmitterpocket.This option is intended foremergencies only. Replace theelectronic key battery as soon aspossible 3 19.For unlocking or locking the doors,see fault in electronic key system3 21.

Retained power offThe following electronic systems canwork until the driver's door is openedor for 10 minutes after the ignition isswitched off:● power windows● sunroof● power outlets

Starting the engineVehicles with power button

Manual transmission: operate clutchand brake pedal.Automatic transmission: operatebrake pedal and move selector leverto P or N.Do not operate accelerator pedal.Press Engine Start/Stop briefly: anautomatic procedure operates thestarter with a short delay until theengine is running.


To switch off the engine when vehicleis stationary, pressEngine Start/Stop briefly. Automatictransmission: apply the parking brakeand engage P.Manual transmission: during anAutostop, the engine can be startedby depressing the clutch pedal3 165.Automatic transmission: during anAutostop, the engine can be startedby releasing the brake pedal 3 165.

Emergency engine shut off duringdrivingIf the engine needs to be switched offduring driving in case of emergency,press Engine Start/Stop for more thantwo seconds or press twice brieflywithin five seconds.

9 Danger

Switching off the engine duringdriving may cause loss of powersupport for brake and steeringsystems. Assistance systems andairbag systems are disabled.

Lighting and brake lights willextinguish. Therefore power downthe engine and ignition whiledriving only when required in caseof emergency.

Starting the vehicle at lowtemperaturesStarting the engine without additionalheaters is possible down to -25 °С fordiesel engines and -30 °C for petrolengines. Required is an engine oilwith the correct viscosity, the correctfuel, performed services and asufficiently charged vehicle battery.With temperatures below -30 °C theautomatic transmission requires awarming phase of approx.five minutes. The selector lever mustbe in position P.

Automatic Starter ControlThis function controls the enginestarting procedure. The driver doesnot need to hold Engine Start/Stoppressed. Once applied, the systemwill go on starting automatically until

the engine is running. Because of thechecking procedure, the engine startsrunning after a short delay.Possible reasons for a non-startingengine:● Clutch pedal not operated

(manual transmission).● Brake pedal not operated or

selector lever not in P or N(automatic transmission).

● Timeout occurred.

Turbo engine warm-upUpon start-up, engine availabletorque may be limited for a short time,especially when the enginetemperature is cold. The limitation isto allow the lubrication system to fullyprotect the engine.

Overrun cut-offThe fuel supply is automatically cut offduring overrun, i.e. when the vehicleis driven with a gear engaged butaccelerator pedal is released.Depending on driving conditions, theoverrun cut-off may be deactivated.


Stop-start systemThe stop-start system helps to savefuel and to reduce the exhaustemissions. When conditions allow, itswitches off the engine as soon as thevehicle is at a low speed or at astandstill, e.g. at a traffic light or in atraffic jam.

ActivationThe stop-start system is available assoon as the engine is started, thevehicle starts-off and the conditionsas stated below in this section arefulfilled.

Deactivation

Deactivate the stop-start systemmanually by pressing Ò. Deactivationis indicated when the LED in thebutton illuminates.

AutostopVehicles with manual transmissionAn Autostop can be activated at astandstill or at a low speed up to9 mph.Activate a conventional Autostop asfollows:● Depress the clutch pedal.● Set the lever to neutral.● Release the clutch pedal.

The engine will be switched off whilethe ignition stays on.

Indication

An Autostop is indicated by theneedle at the AUTOSTOP position inthe tachometer.After restarting, the idle speed isindicated.During an Autostop, the heating andbrake performance will bemaintained.

Conditions for an AutostopThe stop-start system checks if eachof the following conditions is fulfilled.● The stop-start system is not

manually deactivated.● The bonnet is fully closed.


● The driver's door is closed or thedriver's seat belt is fastened.

● The vehicle battery is sufficientlycharged and in good condition.

● The engine is warmed up.● The engine coolant temperature

is not too high.● The engine exhaust temperature

is not too high, e.g. after drivingwith high engine load.

● The ambient temperature isabove -5 °C.

● The climate control systemallows an Autostop.

● The brake vacuum is sufficient.● The self-cleaning function of the

diesel particle filter is not active.● The vehicle was driven at least at

walking speed since the lastAutostop.

Otherwise an Autostop will beinhibited.Certain settings of the climate controlsystem may inhibit an Autostop. SeeClimate control chapter for moredetails 3 148.

Immediately after motorway driving,an Autostop may be inhibited.New vehicle running-in 3 161.

Vehicle battery discharge protectionTo ensure reliable engine restarts,several battery discharge protectionfeatures are implemented as part ofthe stop-start system.

Power saving measuresDuring an Autostop, several electricalfeatures e.g. auxiliary electric heateror heated rear window are disabled orswitched to a power saving mode.The fan speed of the climate controlsystem is reduced to save power.

Restart of the engine by the driver

Vehicles with manual transmissionConventional restartAll engines have conventional restart.Depress the clutch pedal withoutdepressing the brake pedal to restartthe engine.On engines with late restart aconventional restart is only possiblewithout depressed brake pedal.

Late restartAll engines have late restart inaddition to conventional restart. Laterestart is only active on gradients upto 5%.● Depress the brake pedal.● Depress the clutch pedal.● Select first gear.● Release the brake pedal to

restart the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionRelease the brake pedal or moveselector lever out of D into N or P torestart the engine.

Restart of the engine by the stop-start systemThe selector lever must be in neutralto enable an automatic restart.If one of the following conditionsoccurs during an Autostop, theengine will be restarted automaticallyby the stop-start system:● The stop-start system is

manually deactivated.● The bonnet is opened.


● The driver's seat belt isunfastened and the driver's dooris opened.

● The engine temperature is toolow.

● The charging level of the vehiclebattery is below a defined level.

● The brake vacuum is notsufficient.

● The vehicle is driven at least atwalking speed.

● The climate control systemrequests an engine start.

● The air conditioning is manuallyswitched on.

If the bonnet is not fully closed, awarning message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.If an electrical accessory, e.g. aportable CD player, is connected tothe power outlet, a brief power dropduring the restart might be noticeable.

Parking

9 Warning

● Do not park the vehicle on aneasily ignitable surface. Thehigh temperature of theexhaust system could ignite thesurface.

● Always apply the parkingbrake. Pull switch m forapprox. one second and checkif the control indicator milluminates.The electric parking brake isapplied when control indicatorm illuminates 3 107.

● Switch off the engine.● If the vehicle is on a level

surface or uphill slope, engagefirst gear or set the selectorlever to position P beforeswitching off ignition. On anuphill slope, turn the frontwheels away from the kerb.If the vehicle is on a downhillslope, engage reverse gear or

set the selector lever to positionP before switching off ignition.Turn the front wheels towardsthe kerb.

● Close the windows and thesunroof.

● Switch off ignition with powerbutton. Turn the steering wheeluntil the steering wheel lock isfelt to engage.

● Lock the vehicle with button onthe door handle.Activate the anti-theft alarmsystem 3 32.

● The engine cooling fans may runafter the engine has beenswitched off 3 239.

Caution

After running at high enginespeeds or with high engine loads,operate the engine briefly at a lowload or run in neutral forapprox. 30 seconds beforeswitching off, in order to protectthe turbocharger.


NoticeIn the event of an accident withairbag deployment, the engine isturned off automatically if the vehiclecomes to a standstill within a certaintime.

Engine exhaust

9 Danger

Engine exhaust gases containpoisonous carbon monoxide,which is colourless and odourlessand could be fatal if inhaled.If exhaust gases enter the interiorof the vehicle, open the windows.Have the cause of the faultrectified by a workshop.Avoid driving with an open loadcompartment, otherwise exhaustgases could enter the vehicle.

Diesel particle filterAutomatic cleaning processThe diesel particle filter system filtersharmful soot particles out of theexhaust gases. The system includesa self-cleaning function that runsautomatically during driving withoutany notification. The filter is cleanedby periodically burning off the sootparticles at high temperature. Thisprocess takes place automaticallyunder set driving conditions and maytake up to 25 minutes. Typically itneeds between seven and twelveminutes. Autostop is not availableand fuel consumption may be higherduring this period. The emission ofsmells and smoke during this processis normal.

System requires cleaning processUnder certain driving conditions, e.g.short distances, the system cannotclean itself automatically.If cleaning of the filter is required andif previous driving conditions did notenable automatic cleaning, it will be


indicated by illumination of% and awarning message in the DriverInformation Centre.% illuminates along with a warningmessage illuminates when dieselparticle filter is full. Start cleaningprocess as soon as possible.% flashes along with a warningmessage when diesel particle filterhas reached the maximum fillinglevel. Start cleaning processimmediately to avoid damage to theengine.

Activate self-cleaning processTo activate cleaning process,continue driving, keep engine speedabove 2000 rpm. Shift down ifnecessary. Diesel particle filtercleaning is then started.Cleaning takes place quickest at highengine speeds and loads.Control indicator % extinguishes assoon as the self-cleaning operation iscomplete. Keep on driving until self-cleaning operation is complete.

Caution

If possible, do not interruptcleaning process. Drive untilcleaning is completed to avoid theneed for service or repair by aworkshop.

Cleaning process not possibleIf cleaning is not possible for anyreasons, control indicator Zilluminates and a warning messageappears in the Driver InformationCentre. Engine power may bereduced. Seek the assistance of aworkshop immediately.

Catalytic converterThe catalytic converter reduces theamount of harmful substances in theexhaust gases.

Caution

Fuel grades other than those listedon pages 3 230, 3 291 coulddamage the catalytic converter orelectronic components.Unburnt petrol will overheat anddamage the catalytic converter.Therefore avoid excessive use ofthe starter, running the fuel tankdry and starting the engine bypushing or towing.

In the event of misfiring, unevenengine running, a reduction in engineperformance or other unusualproblems, have the cause of the faultrectified by a workshop as soon aspossible. In an emergency, drivingcan be continued for a short period,keeping vehicle speed and enginespeed low.


AdBlueGeneral informationThe selective catalytic reduction(BlueInjection) is a method tosubstantially reduce the nitrogenoxides in the exhaust emission. Thisis achieved by injecting a DieselExhaust Fluid (DEF) into the exhaustsystem. The ammonia released bythe fluid reacts with nitrous gases(NOx) from the exhaust and turns itinto nitrogen and water.The designation of this fluid is AdBlue®. It is a non-toxic, non-flammable,colourless and odourless fluid whichconsists of 32% urea and 68% water.

9 Warning

Avoid contact of your eyes or skinwith AdBlue.In case of eye or skin contact,rinse off with water.

Caution

Avoid contact of the paintwork withAdBlue.In case of contact, rinse off withwater.

AdBlue freezes at a temperature ofapprox. -11 °C. As the vehicle isequipped with an AdBlue pre-heater,the emissions reduction at lowtemperatures is ensured. The AdBluepre-heater works automatically.The typical AdBlue consumption isapprox. two litres per 600 miles, butcan also be higher depending ondriving behaviour (e.g. high load ortowing).

AdBlue tankAt a remaining volume of approx.five litres, there is a liquid level switch.Warning messages are displayedonly below that threshold. Tankvolume 3 299.

Level warningsDepending on the calculated range ofAdBlue, different messages aredisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre. The messages and therestrictions are a legal requirement.The first possible warning is AdBlueRange: 1500 mi.This warning will show up once brieflywith the calculated range. Driving ispossible without any restrictions.The next warning level is entered witha range below 1090 miles. Themessage with the current range willalways be displayed when ignition isswitched on and needs to beconfirmed 3 112. Refill AdBlue beforeentering the next warning level.At an AdBlue range below 560 miles,the following warning messages arealternately displayed and cannot bedismissed:● AdBlue Low Refill Now● Engine Restart Prevented in 560

miles.Additionally, control indicator Yflashes continuously.


NoticeIn case of high AdBlue consumption,the Driver Information Centre maydisplay this warning without theprevious warning stages.

The last warning level is enteredwhen the AdBlue tank is empty.Restart of the engine is not possible.The following warning messages arealternately displayed and cannot bedismissed:● AdBlue Empty Refill Now● Engine Will Not Restart.

Additionally, control indicator Yflashes continuously.With active prevention of an enginestart, the following message will bedisplayed:Refill AdBlue To Start Vehicle.The tank must be refilled completelywith AdBlue, otherwise restarting ofthe engine is not possible.

High emission warningsIf the exhaust emission rises above acertain value, warnings similar to therange warnings will be displayed inthe Driver Information Centre.Requests to have the exhaust systemchecked and finally theannouncement of the prevention ofan engine restart are displayed.These restrictions are a legalrequirement.Consult a workshop for assistance.

Refilling AdBlue

Caution

Only use AdBlue that complieswith European standardsDIN 70 070 and ISO 22241-1.Do not use additives.Do not dilute AdBlue.Otherwise the selective catalyticreduction system could bedamaged.

NoticeWhenever a filling pump with anozzle for passenger cars is notavailable at a filling station, use onlyAdBlue bottles or canisters with asealed refill adapter for refilling, toprevent splashback and overspill,and in order to ensure that the fumesfrom the tank are captured and donot emerge. AdBlue in bottles orcanisters is available in many fillingstations and can be purchased e.g.at Vauxhall dealers and other retailoutlets.Since AdBlue has a limiteddurability, check the date of expirybefore refilling.NoticeThe refilling of AdBlue is onlydetected by the system when theabove mentioned liquid level switchin the tank is activated.In case AdBlue refill is notsuccessfully detected:


1. Continuously drive the vehiclefor 10 minutes making sure thatvehicle speed is always higherthan 12 mph.

2. If AdBlue refill is detectedsuccessfully, AdBlue supply-driven limitations will disappear.

If AdBlue refill is still not detected,seek the assistance of a workshop.If AdBlue must be refilled attemperatures below -11 °C, therefilling of AdBlue may not bedetected by the system. In thisevent, park the vehicle in a spacewith a higher ambient temperatureuntil AdBlue is liquefied.NoticeWhen unscrewing the protective capfrom the filler neck, ammonia fumesmay emerge. Do not inhale as thefumes have a pungent smell. Thefumes are not harmful by inhalation.

The AdBlue tank should be filledcompletely. This must be done if thewarning message regardingprevention of an engine restart isalready displayed.

The vehicle must be parked on a levelsurface.The filler neck for AdBlue is locatedbehind the fuel filler flap, which islocated at right rear side of thevehicle.The fuel filler flap can only be openedif the vehicle is unlocked.1. Remove key from ignition switch.2. Close all doors to avoid ammonia

fumes entering the interior of thevehicle.

3. Release the fuel filler flap bypushing the flap 3 231.

4. Unscrew protective cap from thefiller neck.

5. Open AdBlue canister.6. Mount one end of the hose on the

canister and screw the other endon the filler neck.

7. Lift the canister until it is empty, oruntil the flow from the canister hasstopped. This can take up tofive minutes.

8. Place the canister on the groundto empty the hose, wait15 seconds.

9. Unscrew the hose from the fillerneck.

10. Mount the protective cap and turnclockwise until it engages.

NoticeDispose of AdBlue canisteraccording to environmentalrequirements. Hose can be reusedafter flushing with clear water beforeAdBlue dries out.


Automatic transmissionThe automatic transmission permitsautomatic gear shifting (automaticmode) or manual gear shifting(manual mode).Manual shifting is possible in manualmode by tapping the selector lever to+ or - or pulling the steering wheelpaddles.

Transmission display

Illustrations show different versions.

The mode or selected gear is shownin the Driver Information Centre.In automatic mode, the drivingprogramme is indicated by D.In manual mode, M and the numberof the selected gear is indicated.R indicates reverse gear.N indicates neutral position.P indicates park position.

Selector lever

P : park position, wheels are locked,engage only when the vehicle isstationary

R : reverse gear, engage only whenthe vehicle is stationary

N : neutralD : automatic modeM : manual mode< : upshift in manual mode] : downshift in manual mode


The selector lever is locked in P andcan only be moved when the ignitionis on, the release button on theselector lever is pushed and the brakepedal is applied.Without brake pedal applied, controlindicator j illuminates.If the selector lever is not in P whenthe ignition is switched off, controlindicator j flashes.To engage P or R, press the releasebutton.The engine can only be started withlever in position P or N. When positionN is selected, press brake pedal orapply parking brake before starting.

Do not accelerate while engaging agear. Never depress the acceleratorpedal and brake pedal at the sametime.When a gear is engaged, the vehiclebegins to creep when the brake isreleased.

Engine brakingTo utilise the engine braking effect,select a lower gear in good time whendriving downhill, see manual mode.

Rocking the vehicleRocking the vehicle is onlypermissible if the vehicle is stuck insand, mud or snow. Move the selectorlever between D and R in a repeatpattern. Do not race the engine andavoid sudden acceleration.

ParkingApply the parking brake and engageP.

Manual mode

Selector lever

Move selector lever out of position Dtowards the left in position M.Manual mode M can be activatedfrom position D in each drivingsituation and speed.Tap selector lever upwards + to shiftto a higher gear.Tap the selector lever downwards - toshift to a lower gear.The selected gear is indicated in theinstrument cluster.


Steering wheel paddles

Move selector lever out of position Dtowards the left in position M.Manual mode M can be activatedfrom position D in each drivingsituation and speed.Pull steering wheel paddles to selectgears manually.Pull right paddle + to shift to a highergear.Pull left paddle - to shift to a lowergear.Multiple pulls allow gears to beskipped.

The selected gear is indicated in theinstrument cluster.

Temporary manual mode in drivemode DManual paddle shifting is alsopossible in automatic mode D. Uponcompletion of manual shiftingoperation, transmission changes toautomatic mode D after a definedtime.To interrupt manual mode and returnto D, do one of the following:● Press + paddle for 1 second.● Move selector lever towards the

left to manual mode and back toposition D.

If the vehicle is at a standstill andengine is idling, the transmission willremain in temporary manual mode. Itchanges to automatic mode whenaccelerator pedal is operated for adefined time, and no paddle shiftingat the steering wheel is performed.

GeneralIf a higher gear is selected whenvehicle speed is too low, or a lowergear when vehicle speed is too high,

the shift is not executed. This cancause a message in the DriverInformation Centre.In manual mode, no automaticshifting to a higher gear takes placeat high engine revolutions, exceptactivating the kickdown function.

Gear shift indicationThe symbol R or S with a numberbeside it is indicated when gearshifting is recommended for fuelsaving reasons.Shift indication appears only inmanual mode.

Electronic driving programmes● Following a cold start, the

operating temperatureprogramme increases enginespeed to quickly bring thecatalytic converter to the requiredtemperature.

● When SPORT mode is engaged,the vehicle shifts at higher enginespeeds (unless cruise control ison). SPORT mode 3 183.


● Special programmesautomatically adapt the shiftingpoints when driving up inclines ordown hills.

● In snowy or icy conditions or onother slippery surfaces, theelectronic transmission controlenables the driver to manuallyselect first, second or third gearfor starting off.

KickdownPressing down the accelerator pedalbeyond the kickdown detent will leadto maximum acceleration even inmanual mode. The transmissionshifts to a lower gear depending onengine speed and shifts to a highergear at high engine revolutions.

Overheat protectionIn the event of transmission-overheating due to high outsidetemperatures or sporty driving style,the torque and the maximum speed ofthe engine can be temporarilyreduced.

FaultIn the event of a fault a vehiclemessage is displayed in the DriverInformation Centre. Vehiclemessages 3 123.6-gear automatic transmission:electronic transmission controlenables only fourth gear; 8-gearautomatic transmission: electronictransmission control enables onlythird gear. The transmission nolonger shifts automatically.Have the cause of the fault remediedby a workshop.

Interruption of power supplyIn the event of an interruption ofpower supply, the selector levercannot be moved out of the Pposition. The ignition key cannot beremoved from the ignition switch.If the vehicle battery is discharged,start the vehicle using jump leads3 276.If the vehicle battery is not the causeof the fault, release the selector lever.1. Apply parking brake.

2. Release the selector lever trimfrom the centre console. Pokewith a finger into the leathersocket below the selector leverand push the trim upwards.Rotate trim to the left.


3. Insert a small stick (e.g. a pen orscrewdriver) into the opening nearthe selector lever. Push down thestick vertically and move theselector lever out of P. If thisposition is engaged again, theselector lever will be locked again.Have the cause of the powersupply interruption remedied by aworkshop.

4. Mount the selector lever trim ontothe centre console and refit.

Manual transmission

To engage reverse, depress theclutch pedal and then press therelease button on the selector leverand engage the gear.If the gear does not engage, set thelever to neutral, release the clutchpedal and depress again; then repeatgear selection.Do not slip the clutch unnecessarily.When operating, depress the clutchpedal completely. Do not use thepedal as a foot rest.

When clutch slip is detected for aspecific time, the engine power will bereduced. A warning is displayed in theDriver Information Centre. Releasethe clutch.

Caution

It is not advisable to drive with thehand resting on the selector lever.

Gear shift indication 3 108.Stop-start system 3 165.


Drive systemsAll-wheel driveThe All-wheel drive system enhancesdriving characteristics and stability,and helps to achieve the bestpossible driveability regardless ofground surface. The system is alwaysactive and cannot be deactivated.The torque is distributed steplesslybetween the wheels of the front andrear axle up to a torque split of 50%to 50%. Depending on the drivingconditions, i.e. steady state driving,All wheel drive system transfers aminimum amount of torque for fuelefficiency. Additionally the torquevectoring between the rear wheels isdistributed depending on the vehicledynamic and surface.This is possible because the All wheeldrive system operates with twoclutches, one on each side.For optimum system performance,the vehicle's tyres should not havevarying degrees of wear.

If a service message is displayed inthe Driver Information Centre, thesystem may have limited functionality(or be completely disabled in somecases, i.e. the vehicle switches toFront-wheel drive). Seek theassistance of a workshop.Towing the vehicle 3 277.

BrakesThe brake system comprises twoindependent brake circuits.If a brake circuit fails, the vehicle canstill be braked using the other brakecircuit. However, braking effect isachieved only when the brake pedalis depressed firmly. Considerablymore force is needed for this. Thebraking distance is extended. Seekthe assistance of a workshop beforecontinuing the journey.When the engine is not running, thesupport of the brake servo unitdisappears once the brake pedal hasbeen depressed once or twice.Braking effect is not reduced, butbraking requires significantly greaterforce. It is especially important to bearthis in mind when being towed.Control indicator R 3 107.Active emergency braking 3 201.

Antilock brake systemAntilock brake system (ABS)prevents the wheels from locking.


ABS starts to regulate brake pressureas soon as a wheel shows a tendencyto lock. The vehicle remainssteerable, even during hard braking.ABS control is made apparentthrough a pulse in the brake pedaland the noise of the regulationprocess.For optimum braking, keep the brakepedal fully depressed throughout thebraking process, despite the fact thatthe pedal is pulsating. Do not reducethe pressure on the pedal.After starting off, the system performsa self-test which may be audible.

Control indicator u 3 108.

Adaptive brake lightDuring full braking, all three brakelights flash for the duration of ABScontrol.

Fault

9 Warning

If there is a fault in the ABS, thewheels may be liable to lock dueto braking that is heavier thannormal. The advantages of ABSare no longer available. Duringhard braking, the vehicle can nolonger be steered and mayswerve.


Parking brake

9 Warning

Before leaving the vehicle, checkparking brake status. Controlindicator m must illuminateconstantly.

Electric parking brake

Applying when vehicle is stationary

9 Warning

Pull switch m for a minimum ofone second until control indicatorm illuminates constantly andelectric parking brake is applied3 107. The electric parking brakeoperates automatically withadequate force.Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe electric parking brake status.Control indicator m 3 107.


The electric parking brake can alwaysbe activated, even if the ignition is off.Do not operate electric parking brakesystem too often without enginerunning as this will discharge thevehicle battery.

ReleasingSwitch on ignition. Keep foot brakepedal depressed and then pushswitch m.

Drive away functionVehicles with manual transmission:Depressing the clutch pedal and thenslightly releasing the clutch pedal andslightly depressing the acceleratorpedal releases the electric parkingbrake automatically. This is notpossible when switch m is pulled atthe same time.Vehicles with automatic transmission:Engaging D and then depressing theaccelerator pedal releases theelectric parking brake automatically.This is not possible when switch m ispulled at the same time.

Dynamic braking when vehicle ismovingWhen the vehicle is moving and theswitch m is kept pulled, the electricparking brake system will deceleratethe vehicle, but will not applystatically.As soon as the switch m is released,dynamic braking will be stopped.

Automatic applyingIf the vehicle is equipped withautomatic transmission and adaptivecruise control is active, electricparking brake is applied automaticallywhen vehicle is stopped by thesystem for more than two minutes.Parking brake releases automaticallyafter moving off.

Functionality checkWhen the vehicle is not moving, theelectric parking brake might beapplied automatically. This is done tocheck the system.

FaultFailure mode of electric parking brakeis indicated by a control indicator jand by a vehicle message which isdisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre. Vehicle messages 3 123.Apply electric parking brake: pull andhold the switch m for more thanfive seconds. If control indicator milluminates, electric parking brake isapplied.Release electric parking brake: pushand hold the switch m for more thantwo seconds. If control indicator mextinguishes, electric parking brake isreleased.Control indicator m flashes: electricparking brake is not fully applied orreleased. When continuouslyflashing, release electric parkingbrake and retry applying.

Brake assistIf brake pedal is depressed quicklyand forcefully, maximum brake forceis automatically applied.


Operation of brake assist mightbecome apparent by a pulse in thebrake pedal and a greater resistancewhen depressing the brake pedal.Maintain steady pressure on thebrake pedal as long as full braking isrequired. Maximum brake force isautomatically reduced when brakepedal is released.

Hill start assistThe system helps prevent unintendedmovement when driving away oninclines.When releasing the brake pedal afterstopping on an incline, brakes remainon for further two seconds. Thebrakes release automatically as soonas the vehicle begins to accelerate.

Ride control systemsTraction Control systemThe Traction Control system (TC) is acomponent of the Electronic StabilityControl (ESC).TC improves driving stability whennecessary, regardless of the type ofroad surface or tyre grip, bypreventing the drive wheels fromspinning.As soon as the drive wheels starts tospin, engine output is reduced andthe wheel spinning the most is brakedindividually. This considerablyimproves the driving stability of thevehicle on slippery road surfaces.

TC is operational after each enginestart as soon as the control indicatorb extinguishes.When TC operates b flashes.

9 Warning

Do not let this special safetyfeature tempt you into taking riskswhen driving.Adapt speed to the roadconditions.

Control indicator b 3 108.

Deactivation

TC can be switched off when spinningof drive wheels is required: press tbriefly.


Control indicator k illuminates.A status message appears in theDriver Information Centre when TC isdeactivated.When TC is deactivated, ESCremains active but with higher controlthreshold.TC is reactivated by pressing t again.A status message pops up in theDriver Information Centre when TC isreactivated.TC is also reactivated the next timethe ignition is switched on.

FaultIf there is a fault in the system thecontrol indicator b illuminatescontinuously and a message appearsin the Driver Information Centre. Thesystem is not operational.


Electronic Stability ControlElectronic Stability Control (ESC)improves driving stability whennecessary, regardless of the type ofroad surface or tyre grip.As soon as the vehicle starts toswerve (understeer/oversteer),engine output is reduced and thewheels are braked individually.ESC operates in combination with theTraction Control system (TC). Itprevents the drive wheels fromspinning.Torque distribution is a specialfeature that allocates the torque to thedrive wheels before the ESCintervenes. When cornering, thewheels on the inner curve are brakedindividually. Additionally, enginetorque will be delivered to the drivewheel on the outer curve. Thisreduces the tendency ofundersteering and improves tractionwhen cornering fast.

ESC is operational after each enginestart as soon as the control indicatorb extinguishes.When ESC operates b flashes.

9 Warning

Do not let this special safetyfeature tempt you into taking riskswhen driving.Adapt speed to the roadconditions.

Control indicator b 3 108.


Deactivation

ESC and TC can be deactivated:● hold t pressed for a minimum of

five seconds: ESC and TC areboth deactivated. k and tilluminate and status messagesappear in the Driver InformationCentre.

● To deactivate only Tractioncontrol system press button tbriefly: TC is inactive but ESCremains active, k illuminates. Astatus message appears in theDriver Information Centre whenTC is deactivated.

ESC is reactivated by pressing the tbutton again. If the TC system waspreviously disabled, both TC andESC are reactivated. k and textinguishes when TC and ESC arereactivated.ESC is also reactivated the next timethe ignition is switched on.

FaultIf there is a fault in the system thecontrol indicator b illuminatescontinuously and a message appearsin the Driver Information Centre. Thesystem is not operational.


Interactive driving systemFlex RideFlex Ride driving system allows thedriver to select between three drivingmodes:● SPORT mode: press SPORT,

LED illuminates.● TOUR mode: press TOUR, LED

illuminates.● AUTO mode: neither SPORT nor

TOUR is pressed, no LEDilluminates.

Deactivate SPORT mode or TOURmode by pressing correspondingbutton once more.In each driving mode Flex Rideadjusts the following electronicsystems:● electronic damping control● accelerator pedal control● electronic power steering control● automatic transmission


● adaptive cruise control● all-wheel drive● engine sound enhancement● instrument cluster theme

SPORT mode

The settings of the systems areadjusted for a sportier driving style:● Damping of shock absorbers is

set up for increased handling andagility.

● The engine reacts more quicklyto accelerator pedal changes.

● Steering support is sportier.

● Automatic transmission shiftpoints optimised for sportydriving.

● Adaptive cruise control isadjusted for a sportier drivingstyle.

● All-wheel drive supports activesporty driving of the vehicle.

● Engine sound enhancementintensifies interior engine soundin a sporty manner.

● Cluster theme changes to sport.

TOUR mode

TOUR mode adjusts the settings ofthe systems for a comfortable drivingstyle.● Damping of shock absorbers is

adapted for increased drivingcomfort.

● Steering efforts are reduced.● Adaptive cruise control is

adjusted for a more relaxeddriving style.

AUTO modeAll settings of the systems are presetto standard values optimised for dailydriving (default mode). This is the fullyadaptive mode, adjusting systems toboth comfort and sport settingsdepending on driving style and drivingsituation.

Adaptive drive mode controlWithin each manually selected drivingmode SPORT, TOUR or AUTO, DriveMode Control (DMC) detects andanalyses continuously the drivingsituation and the driver's driving style.If necessary, DMC automaticallyadjusts damping and steering for theduration of the occuring situation.


If, for example, normal settings areactive in AUTO mode and DMCdetects a sporty driving behaviour, itautomatically changes systems intosporty settings unless the driverdeselects sporty damping or steeringin the Sport Mode Customisation.If, for another example, comfortsettings are active in TOUR modeand whilst driving on a winding road asudden hard brake is necessary,DMC will detect the dynamic vehiclecondition and changes the settingsfor suspension back to normal(default) setting to enhance vehiclestability.When the driving characteristic or thedynamic vehicle state returns to theformer state, DMC will change topreselected settings.

Flex Ride visualisation menu

On 8" Info Display a Flex Ridevisualisation menu can be displayedby touching ê on the screen. On thispage the selected drive mode andactive setup are displayed.System settings are highlighted in redfor sport, blue for comfort and yellowfor normal.Additionally the personalisation ofadaptive AUTO mode sensitivity aswell as the personalisation of Sportmode functions can be displayed inthe visualisation menu by selectingthe respective button on the Infodisplay.

Personalisation of AUTO modesensitivityThe driver can change the sensitivityof adaptive AUTO mode in threesteps via the Flex Ride visualisationmenu.● Normal: default setting.● Sport sensitive: systems change

to sport settings faster whiledriving sporty.

● Comfort sensitive: systemschange to comfort settings fasterwhile cruising.

Additionally any drive mode controladaption can be deactivated.Flex Ride visualisation menu will bedisplayed by touching ê on the 8"Info display.Select Auto-Mode Customisation andchange the relevant settings.The settings can also be changed inthe personalisation menu in the Infodisplay, I Settings 3 125.Info display 3 119.


Personalisation of Sport modesettingsThe driver can customise the settingsof the SPORT mode via the Flex Ridevisualisation menu.Flex Ride visualisation menu will bedisplayed when SPORT mode isselected or by touching ê on the 8"Info display.Select Sport Mode Customisationand select the relevant settings.The settings can also be changed inthe personalisation menu in the InfoDisplay, I Settings 3 125.Info display 3 119.

Driver assistancesystems

9 Warning

Driver assistance systems aredeveloped to support the driverand not to replace the driver'sattention.The driver stays in full control ofthe vehicle and accepts fullresponsibility when driving thevehicle.When using driver assistancesystems, always take careregarding the current trafficsituation and follow applicabletraffic rules.

Cruise controlThe cruise control can store andmaintain speeds of approx. 20 mph tomaximum vehicle speed. Deviationsfrom the stored speeds may occurwhen driving uphill or downhill.Activating in first gear is not possible.

Do not use the cruise control if it is notadvisable to maintain a constantspeed.



Control indicator m 3 111.

Switching on

Press m; control indicator m ininstrument cluster illuminates white.

Activation

Accelerate to the desired speed andturn thumb wheel to SET/-, thecurrent speed is stored andmaintained. Control indicator m ininstrument cluster illuminates green.On Mid- and Uplevel display milluminates green and set speed isindicated. Accelerator pedal can bereleased.

Vehicle speed can be increased bydepressing the accelerator pedal.When the accelerator pedal isreleased, the previously stored speedis resumed.Cruise control remains activatedwhile gearshifting.

Increase speedWith cruise control active, hold thumbwheel turned to RES/+ or briefly turnto RES/+ repeatedly: speedincreases continuously or in smallincrements.Alternatively accelerate to the desiredspeed and store by turning to SET/-.

Reduce speedWith cruise control active, hold thumbwheel turned to SET/- or briefly turn toSET/- repeatedly: speed decreasescontinuously or in small increments.

DeactivationPress y; control indicator m ininstrument cluster illuminates white.On Mid- or Uplevel display mchanges to white.Cruise control is deactivated, but notswitched off. Last stored speedremains in memory for later speedresume.Automatic deactivation:● Vehicle speed is below approx.

20 mph.● Vehicle speed drops more than

15 mph below the set speed.● The brake pedal is depressed.● The clutch pedal is depressed for

a few seconds.● The selector lever is in N.● Engine speed is in a very low

range.


● The Traction Control system orElectronic Stability Control isoperating.

● Parking brake is applied.● Simultaneous pressing RES/+

and brake pedal deactivatescruise control and will deletestored speed.

Resume stored speedTurn thumb wheel to RES/+ at aspeed above 20 mph. The storedspeed will be obtained.

Switching offPress m, control indicator m ininstrument cluster extinguishes. Thestored speed is deleted.Pressing L to activate the speedlimiter or switching off the ignition alsoswitches off cruise control anddeletes the stored speed.

Speed limiterThe speed limiter prevents thevehicle exceeding a preset maximumspeed.

The maximum speed can be set atspeeds above 15 mph up to125 mph.The driver can only accelerate up tothe preset speed. Deviations from thelimited speed may occur when drivingdownhill.The preset speed limit is displayed inthe Driver Information Centre whenthe system is active.

Activation


Press L, symbol L illuminates in theDriver Information Centre.If cruise control has been activatedbefore, it is switched off when speedlimiter is activated and the controlindicator m extinguishes.

Set speed limitAccelerate to the desired speed andbriefly turn thumb wheel to SET/-: thecurrent speed is stored as maximumspeed.On Baselevel display L and thespeed limit is displayed.


On Mid- and Uplevel display Lchanges to green.

Change speed limitWith speed limiter active, hold orbriefly turn thumb wheel to RES/+ toincrease or SET/- to decrease thedesired maximum speed.

Exceeding the speed limitWhen exceeding the limited speedwithout driver input, the speed willflash in the Driver Information Centreand a chime sounds during thisperiod.In the event of an emergency, it ispossible to exceed the speed limit bydepressing the accelerator pedalfirmly nearly to the final point. In thiscase no chime appears.

Release the accelerator pedal andthe speed limiter function isreactivated once a speed lower thanthe limit speed is obtained.

DeactivationPress y: speed limiter is deactivatedand the vehicle can be driven withoutspeed limit.

On Baselevel display the storedlimited speed is indicated in brackets.On Mid- or Uplevel display Lchanges to white.Additionally, a correspondingmessage appears.Speed limiter is deactivated, but notswitched off. Last stored speedremains in memory for later speedresume.

Resume limit speedTurn thumb wheel to RES/+. Thestored speed limit will be obtainedand is indicated without brackets inthe Driver Information Centre.

Switching offPress L, the speed limit indicationextinguishes in the Driver InformationCentre. The stored speed is deleted.By pressing m to activate cruisecontrol or adaptive cruise control,speed limiter is also deactivated andthe stored speed is deleted.By switching off the ignition, speedlimiter is also deactivated, but thespeed limit will be stored for nextspeed limiter activation.

Adaptive cruise controlAdaptive cruise control is anenhancement to conventional cruisecontrol with the additional feature ofmaintaining a certain distance behindthe vehicle ahead.


Adaptive cruise control automaticallydecelerates the vehicle whenapproaching a slower moving vehicle.It then adjusts the vehicle speed tofollow the vehicle ahead at theselected following distance. Thevehicle speed increases or decreasesto follow the vehicle in front, but willnot exceed the set speed. It mayapply limited braking with activatedbrake lights.To facilitate overtaking a vehicle onthe motorway, the activation of theturn signal reduces the followingdistance for a short time. This functionis implemented only on the respectivedriver's side depending on left or righthand drive vehicle configuration.The adaptive cruise control can storeset speed over 19 mph for manualtransmission. On vehicles withautomatic transmissions the systemcan brake until a full stop and drive offfrom a stop.

Adaptive cruise control uses radarand camera sensors to detect thevehicles ahead. If no vehicle isdetected in the driving path, theadaptive cruise control will behavelike a conventional cruise control.Adaptive cruise control is mainlyadvised to be used on long straightroads like highways or country roadswith steady traffic. Do not use thesystem if it is not advisable tomaintain a constant speed.Control indicator A 3 111, C 3 111.

9 Warning

The complete driver attention isalways required while driving withadaptive cruise control. The driverstays fully in control of the vehiclebecause the brake pedal, the

accelerator pedal and the cancelswitch have priority over anyadaptive cruise control operation.

Switching on



Press C to switch on adaptive cruisecontrol. C appears in the DriverInformation Centre.

Activation by setting the speedAdaptive cruise control can beactivated at speeds above 15 mph onvehicles with automatic transmissionor 19 mph on vehicles with manualtransmission. The upper speed limit is112 mph.Accelerate to the desired speed andturn thumb wheel to SET/-, thecurrent speed is stored andmaintained.

The adaptive cruise control symbolC, the following distance setting andset speed are indicated in the DriverInformation Centre.The accelerator pedal can bereleased. Adaptive cruise controlremains activated during gearshifting.

Overriding set speedIt is always possible to drive fasterthan the selected set speed bydepressing the accelerator pedal.When the accelerator pedal isreleased, the vehicle returns to thedesired distance if a slower vehicle isahead. Otherwise it returns to thestored speed.

Once the system is activated,adaptive cruise control decelerates orbrakes if it detects a vehicle ahead,which is slower or closer than thedesired following distance.

9 Warning

Accelerating by the driverdeactivates automatic braking bythe system. This is indicated as apop-up warning in the DriverInformation Centre or by theadaptive cruise control symbolturning blue.

Take over current speedIf the accelerator pedal is pressed,the current vehicle speed is takenover as stored speed. This is alsovalid, if the current vehicle speed islower than the Set Speed.

Increase speedWith adaptive cruise control active,hold RES/+ to increase speedcontinuously. Push RES/+ repeatedlyto increase speed in smallincrements.


Reduce speedWith adaptive cruise control active,hold SET/- to decrease speedcontinuously. Push SET/- repeatedlyto decrease speed in smallincrements.

Resume stored speedIf a speed was stored before andsystem is switched on but inactive,turn thumb wheel to RES/+ at a speedabove 3 mph (with AutomaticTransmission) or above 19 mph (withmanual transmission) to resume thestored speed.

Full speed range adaptive cruisecontrol on vehicles with automatictransmissionFull speed range adaptive cruisecontrol will maintain a followingdistance behind a detected vehicleand slow your vehicle to a stop behindthat vehicle.When the vehicle ahead acceleratesafter a brief stop, the adaptive cruisecontrol will drive off automaticallywithout driver action. If necessary,

press RES/+ or the accelerator pedalto resume adaptive cruise control.Pressing the accelerator pedal allowsmore control over the accelerationafter driving off. Note that automaticbraking is disabled during usage ofthe accelerator pedal.If the stopped vehicle ahead standsfor a longer time and then begins tomove forward, the green illuminatedvehicle ahead control indicator A willflash and a warning chime will soundas a reminder to check traffic beforeresuming.

9 Warning

When full speed range adaptivecruise control is deactivated orcancelled, the vehicle will nolonger be held at a stop and canstart moving. Always be preparedto manually apply the brake pedalto hold the vehicle stationary.Do not leave the vehicle while it isbeing held at a stop by the fullspeed range adaptive cruisecontrol. Always move selector

lever to park position P and switchoff the ignition before leaving thevehicle.

Setting the following distanceWhen adaptive cruise control detectsa slower moving vehicle in the drivingpath, it will adjust the vehicle speed tomaintain the following distanceselected by the driver.The following distance can be set tonear, medium or far.


Press E, the current setting is shownin the Driver Information Centre.Press E again to change thefollowing distance. The setting is alsodisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre.

The selected following distance isindicated by filled distance bars in theadaptive cruise control page.Note that the following distancesetting is shared with the sensitivitysetting of forward collision alert3 197.

Example: If setting 3 (far) is selected,then the driver is warned soonerbefore a possible collision, also ifadaptive cruise control is inactive orswitched off.

9 Warning

The Driver accepts fullresponsibility to drive with theappropriate following distancebased on traffic, weather, visibilityand regional regulation. Followingdistance must be adjusted or thesystem switched off when requiredby the prevailing conditions.

Adaptive cruise control in Sportmode

On vehicles with Flex Ride drivingmodes, the driver can slightlyincrease the Adaptive cruise controlacceleration when Sport mode isselected. This function can bedeactivated in the Flex Ridevisualisation menu 3 183


Detecting the vehicle ahead

The green illuminated vehicle aheadcontrol indicator A is displayed whenthe system detects a vehicle in thedriving path. The range of the sensorsis between 25 and 150 metresdepending on vehicle speed.Forward collision alert 3 197.If this symbol does not display, ordisplays briefly, adaptive cruisecontrol will not respond to vehiclesahead.

DeactivationAdaptive cruise control is deactivatedby the driver when:● y is pressed.● Brake pedal is applied.

● Clutch pedal is depressed formore than four seconds.

● Selector lever of automatictransmission is moved to N.

The system is also automaticallydeactivated when:● Vehicle speed accelerates above

120 mph or slows down below15 mph, on vehicles withautomatic transmission it slowsdown to a stop withoutdeactivating within five minutes.

● The Traction Control system isdeactivated or operating.

● The Electronic Stability Control isdeactivated or operating.

● There is no traffic and nothingdetected on the road sides forapprox. one minute. In this casethere are no radar echoes andthe sensor may report that it isblocked.

● The active emergency brakingsystem is applying the brakes.

● Driving on steep inclines.● The radar sensor is blocked by

an ice or water film.

● A fault is detected in the radar,camera, engine or brake system.

● The brakes need to cool down.Additionally, the system isautomatically deactivated on vehicleswith automatic transmission (fullspeed range adaptive cruise control)when:● The incline uphill or downhill is

greater than 20 %.● The electric parking brake is

applied.● The vehicle is being held to a stop

by the system for more thanfive minutes.

● The vehicle stops, the driver'sseat belt is unbuckled and thedriver's door is opened.

When adaptive cruise control isdeactivated, the control indicator mchanges from green to white and apop-up message is displayed in theDriver Information Centre.The stored speed is maintained.


On Midlevel display, the stored speedis indicated in brackets in the DriverInformation Centre when the systemis deactivated but not switched off.On Uplevel display, the adaptivecruise control symbol C changesfrom green to white when the systemis deactivated but not switched off.

9 Warning

When adaptive cruise control isdeactivated, the driver must takeover full brake and engine controlimmediately.

Switching offPress C to switch off adaptive cruisecontrol. The control indicator C in theDriver Information Centreextinguishes. The stored speed isdeleted.

Switching off the ignition alsoswitches off adaptive cruise controland deletes the stored speed.

Driver's attention● Use adaptive cruise control

carefully on bends or mountainroads, as it can lose the vehicleahead and needs time to detect itagain.

● Do not use the system onslippery roads as it can createrapid changes in tyre traction(wheel spinning), so that youcould lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not use adaptive cruisecontrol during rain, snow orheavy dirt, as the radar sensorcan be covered by a water film,dust, ice or snow. This reduces orsuppresses completely thevisibility. In case of sensorblockage, clean the sensorcover.

System limits

9 Warning

The system's automatic brakeforce does not permit hard brakingand the braking level may not besufficient to avoid a collision.

● After a sudden lane change, thesystem needs a certain time todetect the next precedingvehicle. So if a new vehicle isdetected, the system mayaccelerate instead of braking.

● Adaptive cruise control doesignore the oncoming traffic.

● Adaptive cruise control does notconsider pedestrians andanimals for braking and drivingoff.

● Adaptive cruise control considersstopped vehicles only at lowspeed.


● Do not use adaptive cruisecontrol when towing a trailer.

● Do not use adaptive cruisecontrol on roads with an incline ofmore than 10%.

Bends

The adaptive cruise control calculatesa predicted path based on thecentrifugal force. This predicted pathconsiders the current bendcharacteristic, but cannot consider afuture bend change. The system maylose the current vehicle ahead orconsider a vehicle which is not in theactual lane. This can happen whenentering or exiting a bend or if thebend gets stronger or weaker. Thecamera applies a certain correctionbased on the detectable lanemarkings. The control indicator A willextinguish, if a vehicle ahead is nolonger detected.

If the centrifugal force is too high in abend, the system slows down thevehicle slightly. This braking level isnot designed to avoid spinning-off thebend. The driver is responsible forreducing the selected speed beforeentering a bend and in general toadapt the speed to the road type andto existing speed limits.

MotorwaysOn motorways, adapt the set speedto the situation and the weather.Always consider that adaptive cruisecontrol has a limited visibility range, alimited braking level and a certainreaction time to verify if a vehicle is onthe driving path or not. Furthermore,Adaptive cruise control was designedto brake as late as possible to allowchanging the lane before theautomatic braking. Adaptive cruisecontrol may not be able to brake thevehicle in time to avoid a collision with

a much slower vehicle or after a lanechange.This is particularly true whiledriving fast or if the visibility isreduced due to weather conditions.While entering or exiting a motorway,adaptive cruise control may lose thevehicle ahead and accelerate up tothe set speed. For this reason,decrease the set speed before theexit or before the entry.

Vehicle path changes

If another vehicle enters your drivingpath, adaptive cruise control will firstconsider the vehicle when it iscompletely in your path. Be ready totake action and depress the brakepedal, if you need to brake morequickly.


Hill and trailer considerations

9 Warning

Do not use adaptive cruise controlon steep hill roads.

System performance on hills dependson vehicle speed, vehicle load, trafficconditions and the road gradient. Itmay not detect a vehicle in your pathwhile driving on hills. Full speed rangeadaptive control is deactivatedautomatically, as the vehicle isstopping uphill on an incline greaterthan 10%. In this condition, beprepared to take control of thevehicle.Note that applying the brakedeactivates the system.

Radar unit

The radar unit is mounted behind theradiator grille behind or below thebrand emblem.

9 Warning

The radar unit was alignedcarefully during manufacture.Therefore, in the event of a front-end impact, do not use the system.The front bumper may appear tobe intact, however the sensorbehind can be out of position andreact incorrectly. After an

accident, consult a workshop toverify and adjust the radar unitposition.

SettingsSettings can be changed in thevehicle personalisation menu in theInfo-Display.Select the relevant setting in Settings,I Vehicle in the Info-Display.Info-Display 3 119.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

FaultIf the adaptive cruise control does notwork due to temporary conditions(e.g. blockage by ice, overheatedbrakes or low speed manoeuvres) orif there is a permanent system error,a message is displayed in the DriverInformation Centre.Vehicle messages 3 123.

Forward collision alertThe forward collision alert may help toavoid or reduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes.


If the vehicle is equipped withconventional cruise control, theforward collision alert uses the frontcamera in the windscreen to detect avehicle directly ahead, in your path.If the vehicle is equipped withadaptive cruise control, the forwardcollision alert uses the radar sensorand front camera to detect a vehicledirectly ahead, in your path.

A vehicle ahead is indicated by thecontrol indicator A.If a vehicle directly ahead isapproached too quickly, a warningchime and alert in the DriverInformation Centre is provided.Additionally the driver gets notified bya flashing red LED stripe or a pop upsymbol in the head-up display whichis projected on the windscreen in thedriver's field of view.

A precondition is that forward collisionalert in the vehicle personalisationmenu is not deactivated 3 125.

ActivationForward collision alert with frontcamera detects vehicles to distancesof approximately 60 metres andoperates automatically at all speedsabove walking speed.Forward collision alert with radarsensor detects vehicles to distancesof approximately 150 metres andoperates automatically at all speedsabove walking speed.

Alerting the driverThe vehicle ahead control indicatorA illuminates green in the instrumentcluster when the system has detecteda vehicle in the driving path. Onvehicles with head-up display, A isprojected on the windscreen.The control indicator A changes toyellow when the distance to apreceding moving vehicle gets toosmall.

Caution

The colour lighting of this controlindicator does not correspond tolocal traffic laws on followingdistance. The driver bears fullresponsibility for maintaining safefollowing distance according toapplicable traffic rules, weatherand road conditions etc. at alltimes.

When the time to a potential collisionwith a vehicle in front gets too smalland a collision is imminent, thecollision alert symbol pops-up in theDriver Information Centre and thedriver gets notified by a flashing redLED stripe or the pop-up symbol inthe head-up display which isprojected on the windscreen in thedriver's field of view.


Simultaneously a warning chimesounds. Depress the brake pedal andsteer the vehicle, if it is required by thesituation.

Selecting the alert sensitivity

Press K to set the alert sensitivity tonear, medium or far.

The first button press shows thecurrent setting on the DriverInformation Centre. Additional buttonpresses will change this setting. Thechosen setting will remain until it ischanged. The alert timing will varybased on vehicle speed. The fasterthe vehicle speed, the farther awaythe alert will occur. Consider trafficand weather conditions whenselecting the alert timing.

Note that the alert timing sensitivitysetting is shared with the followingdistance setting of the adaptive cruisecontrol. So changing the alert timingsensitivity changes the adaptivecruise control following distancesetting.

DeactivationThe system can be deactivated in thepersonalisation menu, 3 125.If the forward collision alert wasdeactivated, alert sensitivity is set to"medium" when ignition is switchedon next time.


The last selected setting will be storedwhen the ignition is switched off.

General information

9 Warning

Forward collision alert is just awarning system and does notapply the brakes. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead toorapidly, it may not provide youenough time to avoid a collision.The driver accepts fullresponsibility for the appropriatefollowing distance based on traffic,weather and visibility conditions.The complete attention of thedriver is always required whiledriving. The driver must always beready to take action and apply thebrakes.

System limitationsForward collision alert is designed towarn on vehicles only, but may reactalso to other objects.

In the following cases, Forwardcollision alert may not detect a vehicleahead or sensor performance islimited:● Driving on winding or hilly roads.● During nighttime driving.● Weather limits visibility, such as

fog, rain, or snow● The sensor in the windscreen is

blocked by snow, ice, slush, mud,dirt, windscreen damage oraffected by foreign items, e.g.stickers.

Following distanceindicationThe following distance indicationdisplays the distance to a precedingmoving vehicle. The front camera inthe windscreen and the Radar sensorare used to detect the distance of avehicle directly ahead in the vehicle'spath. It is active at speeds above25 mph.

When a preceding vehicle is detectedahead, the distance is indicated inseconds, displayed on a page in theDriver Information Centre.On Baselevel display, choose InfoMenu ? via MENU on the turnsignal lever and turn the adjusterwheel to choose following distanceindication page,3 112

On Mid- and Uplevel display, selectInfo menu via steering wheel buttonsand press å to select followingdistance indication 3 112.The minimum indicated distance is0.5 seconds.


If there is no vehicle ahead or thevehicle ahead is out of range, twodashes will be displayed: -.- sec.

If Adaptive cruise control is active,this page shows the alert sensitivitysetting instead of following distancesetting. 3 189.

System limitationsIn the following cases, followingdistance indication sensorperformance is limited:● Driving on winding or hilly roads.● During nighttime driving.

● Weather limits visibility, such asfog, rain, or snow.

● The sensor is blocked by snow,ice, slush, mud, dirt, windscreendamage or affected by foreignitems, e.g. stickers.

Active emergency brakingActive emergency braking can help toreduce the damage and injury fromcrashes with vehicles, pedestriansand obstacles directly ahead, when acollision can no longer be avoidedeither by manual braking or bysteering. Before the activeemergency braking applies, the driveris warned by the Forward collisionalert 3 197 or the Front pedestrianprotection alert 3 204.The feature uses various inputs (e.g.camera sensor, radar sensor, brakepressure, vehicle speed) to calculatethe probability of a frontal collision.

9 Warning

This system is not intended toreplace the driver responsibility fordriving the vehicle and lookingahead. Its function is limited tosupplemental use only to reducethe vehicle speed before acollision.The system may not react toanimals. After a sudden lanechange, the system needs acertain time to detect the nextpreceding vehicle.The driver must always be readyto take action and apply the brakesand steer to avoid collisions.

FunctionalityIf equipped only with front camera theactive emergency braking operates inforward gear above walking speed upto 53 mph.With radar sensor active emergencybraking operates in forward gearabove walking speed at all speeds.


A precondition is that forward collisionalert with front camera system is notdeactivated in the vehiclepersonalisation menu 3 125.The system includes:● brake preparation system● emergency automatic braking● forward looking brake assist● intelligent brake assist (only with

radar sensor)● front pedestrian protection

system

Brake preparation systemWhen approaching a vehicle aheador a pedestrian so quickly that acollision is likely, the brakepreparation system slightlypressurizes the brakes. This reducesthe response time, when a manual orautomatic braking is requested.The brake system is prepared so thatbraking can occur more rapidly.If equipped only with front camera thesystem operates up to a speed of 50mph.

Emergency automatic brakingAfter activation of brake preparationsystem and just before the imminentcollision, this function automaticallyapplies limited braking to reduce theimpact speed of the collision orprohibit a crash. Depending on thesituation, the vehicle mayautomatically brake moderately orhard. This front automatic braking canonly occur if a vehicle ahead isdetected, indicated by the vehicleahead indicator A 3 197. On vehicleswith front pedestrian protection, frontautomatic braking can also occurwhen a pedestrian ahead is detected,indicated by the pedestrian aheadindicator 7.If equipped only with front camera thesystem operates up to a speed of 50mph.Below a speed of 25 mph the systemcan apply full braking.Emergency automatic braking mayslow the vehicle to a complete stop totry to avoid a potential crash. If thishappens, emergency automaticbraking may engage the electric

parking brake to hold the vehicle at astop. To release press the electricparking brake button or firmly pressthe accelerator pedal.

9 Warning

Emergency automatic braking isan emergency crash preparationfeature and is not designed toavoid crashes. Do not rely on thesystem to brake the vehicle.Emergency automatic braking willnot brake outside of its operatingspeed range and only responds todetected vehicles andpedestrians.

Forward looking brake assistIn addition to the brake preparationsystem and emergency automaticbraking, the forward looking brakeassist function makes the brake assistmore sensitive. Therefore, pressingthe brake pedal less strongly resultsin immediate hard braking. Thisfunction helps the driver brakequicker and harder before theimminent collision.


If equipped only with front camera thesystem operates up to a speed of 53mph.

9 Warning

Active emergency braking is notdesigned to apply hardautonomous braking or toautomatically avoid a collision. It isdesigned to reduce the vehiclespeed before a collision. It may notreact to animals. After a suddenlane change, the system needs acertain time to detect the nextpreceding vehicle.The complete attention of thedriver is always required whiledriving. The driver must always beready to take action and apply thebrakes and steer to avoidcollisions.

The system is designed to work withall occupants wearing their seat belts.

Intelligent Brake AssistIf the vehicle is equipped with radarsensor Intelligent brake assist mayactivate when the brake pedal is

applied quickly by providing a boostto braking based on the speed ofapproach and distance to a vehicleahead.Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedalmovement during this time is normaland the brake pedal should continueto be applied as needed. Intelligentbrake assist will automaticallydisengage only when the brake pedalis released.

9 Warning

Intelligent brake assist mayincrease vehicle braking insituations when it may not benecessary. You could block theflow of traffic. If this occurs, takeyour foot off the brake pedal andthen apply the brakes as needed.

Front pedestrian protection3 204.

DeactivationActive emergency braking can bedeactivated in the personalisationmenu 3 125. If deactivated amessage is displayed in the DriverInformation Centre.

System limitationsIn some cases, the active emergencybraking system may provide anautomatic braking in situations thatseem to be unnecessary, for instancein parking garages, due to traffic signsin a curve or due to vehicles inanother lane. This is normaloperation, the vehicle does not needservice. Firmly apply the acceleratorpedal to override the automaticbraking if the situation and thesurroundings permit.In the following cases, Activeemergency braking performance islimited:● Driving on winding or hilly roads.● Detecting all vehicles, especially

vehicles with a trailer, tractors,muddy vehicles, etc.


● Detecting a vehicle whenweather limits visibility, such as infog, rain, or snow.

● During nighttime driving.● Weather limits visibility, such as

fog, rain, or snow.● The sensor in the windscreen is


To avoid malfunction keep the areasof the camera sensor in thewindscreen and the radar sensor inthe radiator grille always clean fromdirt, dust, ice and snow.Complete attention is always requiredwhile driving, and you should beready to take action and apply thebrakes and/or steer the vehicle toavoid crashes.

FaultIn case the system requires a service,a message is displayed in the DriverInformation Centre.

If the system does not work as itshould do, vehicle messages aredisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre.Vehicle messages 3 123.

Front pedestrian protectionFront pedestrian protection may helpto avoid or reduce the harm causedby front-end crashes with nearbypedestrians when driving in a forwardgear.The system uses the front camera inthe windscreen to detect a pedestriandirectly ahead, in your path.Front pedestrian protection candetect and alert to pedestrians in aforward gear at speeds between 5mph and 50 mph. Additionally Frontpedestrian protection can provide aboost to braking or automaticallybrake the vehicle.During daytime driving, the systemdetects pedestrians up to a distanceof approximately 40 metres. Duringnighttime driving, systemperformance is limited.

Front pedestrian protection can beset to Off, Alert, or Alert & Brake invehicle personalisation 3 125.

9 Danger

Front pedestrian braking does notprovide an alert or automaticallybrake the vehicle, unless it detectsa pedestrian.The system may not detectpedestrians, including children,when the pedestrian is not directlyahead, not fully visible, notstanding upright, or when part of agroup.

Front pedestrian protection includes:● detecting front pedestrian ahead● front pedestrian alert● automatic braking


Detecting front pedestrian ahead

A pedestrian ahead up to a distanceof approximately 40 m is indicated bythe control indicator 7 in theinstrument cluster. On vehicles withhead-up display, 7 is projected on thewindscreen.

Front pedestrian alert

When approaching a detectedpedestrian too quickly, a red flashingLED alert or the pop-up symbol 7 inthe head-up display is projected onthe windscreen in the driver's field ofview. A warning chime is provided.The brake system may prepare fordriver braking to occur more rapidlywhich can cause a brief, milddeceleration. Continue to apply thebrake pedal as required.Cruise control or Adaptive cruisecontrol may be disengaged when theFront pedestrian alert occurs.

Automatic brakingIf a crash into a pedestrian directlyahead is imminent, and the brakeshave not been applied, Automaticbraking may automatically brakemoderately or brake hard. This canhelp to avoid some very low speedpedestrian crashes or reducepedestrian injury.Automatic braking levels may bereduced under certain conditions,such as higher speeds.

If this happens, automatic brakingmay engage the Electric parkingbrake to hold the vehicle at a stop.Release the parking brake. A firmpress of the accelerator pedal willalso release Automatic braking andElectric parking brake 3 179.This system includes Intelligent brakeassist, and the Emergency automaticbraking system may also respond topedestrians. See Active emergencybraking 3 201.Automatic braking can be disabled inthe vehicle personalisation menu3 125.

General information

9 Warning

The driver must always be readyto take action and apply the brakesand steer to avoid collisions.


9 Warning

Front pedestrian braking may alertor automatically brake the vehiclesuddenly in situations where it isunexpected and undesired. Itcould falsely alert or brake forobjects similar in shape or size topedestrians, including shadows.This is normal operation and thevehicle does not need a service.To override Automatic braking,firmly depress the acceleratorpedal, if it is safe to do so.

9 Warning

Using the Front pedestrian brakingsystem while towing a trailer couldcause loss of vehicle control andcrash. Turn the system to Alert orOff in the vehicle personalisationwhen towing a trailer. Vehiclepersonalisation 3 125.

System limitationsIn the following cases, frontpedestrian protection may not detecta pedestrian ahead or sensorperformance is limited:● Vehicle speed is out of range

from 5 mph to 50 mph in forwardgear.

● The distance to an pedestrianahead is more than 40 metres.

● Driving on winding or hilly roads.● During nighttime driving.● Weather limits visibility, such as



Parking assistGeneral informationWhen the trailer hitch is attached,change the configuration settings inthe vehicle personalisation menu inthe Info-Display. Vehiclepersonalisation 3 125.When attaching a trailer or bikecarrier to the trailer hitch, the parkingassist is deactivated.

Rear parking assist

9 Warning

It is the driver who bears fullresponsibility for the parkingmanoeuvre.Always check the surroundingarea while reversing and using therear parking assist system.

The rear parking assist makesparking easier by measuring thedistance between the vehicle andrear obstacles. It informs and warnsthe driver by giving acoustic signalsand display indication.


The system has four ultrasonicparking sensors in the rear bumper.

ActivationAfter ignition is switched on, the rearparking assist is activated.An illuminated LED in the parkingassist button r indicates that thesystem is ready to operate.

IndicationThe system warns the driver withacoustic signals against potentiallyhazardous obstacles behind thevehicle in a distance range up to50 cm while a forward gear is

engaged, respectively up to1.5 metres while reverse gear isengaged.Depending on which side of thevehicle is closer to an obstacle, youwill hear acoustic warning signals inthe vehicle on the respective side.The interval between the soundsbecomes shorter as the vehicle getscloser to that obstacle. When thedistance is less than approx. 30 cm,the sound is continuous.Additionally, the distance to rearobstacles is displayed by changingdistance lines in the DriverInformation Centre 3 112.The distance indication can beinhibited by vehicle messages with ahigher priority. After dismissing themessage distance indication appearsagain.

Deactivation

Press parking assist button r todeactivate, the LED in the buttonextinguishes.

FaultIn the event of a fault or if the systemdoes not work temporarily, e.g.because of high external noise levelor other interference factors, the LEDin the button flashes forthree seconds and then extinguishes.A message is indicated in the DriverInformation Centre.


Front-rear parking assist

9 Warning

The driver bears full responsibilityfor the parking manoeuvre.Always check the surroundingarea when driving backwards orforwards while using parkingassist system.

The front-rear parking assistmeasures the distance between thevehicle and obstacles in front andbehind the vehicle. It informs andwarns the driver by giving acousticsignals and display indication.It uses two different acoustic warningsignals for the front and rearmonitoring areas, each with adifferent tone frequency.

The system has four ultrasonicparking sensors each in the rear andfront bumper.

ActivationThe system is activated automaticallyat a speed up to 7 mph.

An illuminated LED in the parkingassist button r indicates that thesystem is ready to operate.If r is switched off within an ignitioncycle, the front parking assist isdeactivated. If vehicle speed hasexceeded 15 mph beforehand,parking assist will be reactivatedwhen speed drops below 7 mph.When the system is deactivated, theLED in the button extinguishes andPark Assist Off pops-up in the DriverInformation Centre.


IndicationThe system warns the driver withacoustic signals against potentiallyhazardous obstacles in front of thevehicle in a distance range up to 80cm and against potentially hazardousobstacles behind the vehicle in adistance range up to 50 cm while aforward gear is engaged, or up to 1.5m while reverse gear is engaged.Depending on which side of thevehicle is closer to an obstacle, youwill hear acoustic warning signals inthe vehicle on the respective side.The interval between the soundsbecomes shorter as the vehicle getscloser to that obstacle. When thedistance is less than approx. 30 cm,the sound is continuous.Additionally, the distance to rear andfront obstacles is displayed bychanging distance lines in the DriverInformation Centre 3 112 or,depending on the version, on the Info-Display 3 119.

The distance indication can beinhibited by vehicle messages with ahigher priority. After dismissing themessage distance indication appearsagain.Acoustic signal is muted whenparking brake is engaged or theselector lever of automatictransmission is in N.

DeactivationThe system is deactivatedautomatically when vehicle speedexceeds 7 mph.Manual deactivation is also possibleby pressing the parking assist buttonr.

When the system is deactivatedmanually, the LED in the buttonextinguishes and Park Assist Offpops-up in the Driver InformationCentre.After a manual deactivation, the front-rear parking assist is activated againif r is pressed or if reverse gear isengaged.The complete system can bemanually deactivated in the vehiclepersonalisation menu in theInfo-Display. It remains deactivatedduring the ignition cycle or untilactivation in personalisation menuagain. Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

FaultIn the event of a fault or if the systemdoes not work temporarily, e.g.because of high external noise levelor other interference factors, amessage pops-up in the DriverInformation Centre.Vehicle messages 3 123.


Advanced parking assist

9 Warning

The driver bears full responsibilityfor accepting the parking slotsuggested by the system and theparking manoeuvre.Always check the surroundingarea in all directions when usingthe advanced parking assist.

The advanced parking assistmeasures a suitable parking slotwhile passing, calculates thetrajectory and automatically steersthe vehicle into a parallel orperpendicular parking slot.Instructions are given in the DriverInformation Centre 3 112 or,depending on the version, on the Info-Display 3 119, supported by acousticsignals.In vehicles with manual transmission,the driver must control acceleration,braking and gear shifting, whilesteering is done automatically.

In vehicles with automatictransmission, the driver must controlacceleration and gear shifting, whilebraking and steering is doneautomatically.

Advanced parking assist is alwayscombined with front-rear parkingassist. Both systems use the samesensors in the front and rear bumper.The system has six ultrasonic parkingsensors each in both the rear andfront bumper.

Activation of advanced parking assistAdvanced parking assist can only beactivated when driving forwards.

When searching for a parking slot, thesystem is ready to operate with ashort press of (.The system recognises andmemorises ten metres for parallelparking slots or six metres forperpendicular parking slots in theparking assist mode.The system can only be activated ata speed up to 18 mph and the systemsearches for a parking slot at a speedup to 18 mph.The maximum allowed paralleldistance between the vehicle and arow of parked cars is 1.8 metres forparallel parking and 2.5 metres forperpendicular parking.


FunctionalityParking slot searching mode,indication in the Driver InformationCentre

Select parallel or perpendicularparking slot in Driver InformationCentre by long press on (.The system is configured to detectparking slots by default on thepassenger side. To detect parkingslots on the driver side, switch on turnsignal indicator on the driver side.

When a slot is detected, a visualfeedback in the Driver InformationCentre and an acoustic signal isgiven.

Indication in the Colour-Info-Display

Select parallel or perpendicularparking slot by tapping the respectiveicon on the display.Select parking side by tapping therespective icon on the display.


When a slot is detected, a visualfeedback on the Colour-Info-Displayand an acoustic signal is given.If the driver does not stop the vehicleafter a parking slot is proposed, thesystem starts to search for anothersuitable parking slot.Park guiding modeThe parking slot suggestion of thesystem is accepted when the vehicleis stopped by the driver within tenmetres for parallel parking slots orsix metres for perpendicular parkingslots after the Stop message is given.The system calculates the optimalpath into the parking slot.

A brief vibration in the steering wheelafter engaging reverse gear indicatesthat the steering is controlled by thesystem. Then the vehicle with manualtransmission is steered into the slotautomatically by giving the driverdetailed instructions for braking,accelerating and gear shifting. Withautomatic transmission the vehicle issteered into the slot automatically bygiving the driver detailed instructionsfor accelerating and shifting forwardor reversing. The driver must keephands away from the steering wheel.During park guiding mode themanoeuvring speed is limited.Always pay attention to the sound ofthe front-rear parking assist.Continuous sound indicates that thedistance to an obstacle is less thanapprox. 30 cm.If, for any reason, the driver must takeover control of the steering, hold thesteering wheel only at the outer edge.Automatic steering is cancelled in thisevent.

Display indicationThe instructions on the display show:● General hints and warning

messages.● A hint when driving faster than

18 mph during parking slotsearching mode.

● The demand to stop the vehicle,when a parking slot is detected.

● The direction of driving during theparking manoeuvre.

● The demand to shift into reverseor first gear, or R or D withautomatic transmission.

● The demand to stop or to driveslowly.

● For some of the instructions aprogress bar is shown in theDriver Information Centre.

● The successful completion of theparking manoeuvre indicated bya pop-up symbol and a chime.

● The cancelling of a parkingmanoeuvre.


Display prioritiesAdvanced parking assist indication inthe Driver Information Centre can beinhibited by vehicle messages with ahigher priority. After approving themessage by pressing SET/CLR onthe turn signal lever or 9 on thesteering wheel, advanced parkingassist instructions appear again andthe parking manoeuvre can becontinued.

DeactivationThe system is deactivated by:● a short press of (● parking manoeuvre successfully

ended● driving faster than 18 mph during

parking slot search● driving faster than 5 mph during

parking guidance● driver interference on steering

wheel detected● exceeding maximum number of

gear changes: eight cycles whenparallel parking or five cycleswhen perpendicular parking

● switching off the ignition

Deactivation by the driver or by thesystem during manoeuvring will beindicated by Parking Deactivated onthe display. Additionally, an acousticsignal sounds.

FaultA message appears when:● There is a fault in the system.● The driver did not successfully

complete the parkingmanoeuvre.

● The system is not operational.● Any of the deactivation reasons

described above apply.If an object is detected during parkinginstructions, Stop is indicated on thedisplay. Removing the object willresume the parking manoeuvre. If theobject is not removed, the system willbe deactivated. A long press of ( willactivate the system and search for anew parking slot.

Basic notes on parking assistsystems

9 Warning

Under certain circumstances,various reflective surfaces onobjects or clothing as well asexternal noise sources may causethe system to fail to detectobstacles.Special attention must be paid tolow obstacles which can damagethe lower part of the bumper.

Caution

Performance of the system can bereduced when sensors arecovered, e.g. by ice or snow.Performance of the parking assistsystem can be reduced due toheavy loading.Special conditions apply if thereare taller vehicles in the vicinity(e.g. off-road vehicles, mini vans,vans). Object identification and


correct distance indication in theupper part of these vehiclescannot be guaranteed.Objects with a very small reflectioncross-section, e.g. objects ofnarrow size or soft materials, maynot be detected by the system.Parking assist systems do notdetect objects outside thedetection range.

NoticeIt is possible that the sensor detectsa non-existing object caused byecho disturbance from externalacoustic noise or mechanicalmisalignments (sporadic falsewarnings may occur).Make sure that the front numberplate is properly mounted (not bentand no gaps to the bumper on the leftor right side) and the sensors arefirmly in place.Advanced parking assist systemmay not respond to changes in theavailable parking space afterinitiating a parking manoeuvre. Thesystem may recognize an entry, a

gateway, a courtyard or even acrossing as a parking slot. Afterselecting reverse gear the systemwill start a parking manoeuvre. Takecare regarding the availability of thesuggested parking slot.Low curbs and surface irregularities,e.g. on construction zones, are notdetected by the system. The driveraccepts responsibility.NoticeNew vehicles require a calibrationduring first use. For optimal parkingguidance, a driving distance of atleast 6 miles, including a number ofbends, is required.System is calibrated to factory-fittedwheels. Parking performance isaltered with other tyre or wheelssizes.

Side blind zone assistantThe side blind zone alert systemdetects and reports objects on eitherside of the vehicle, within a specified"blind spot" zone. The systemdisplays a visual alert in each exterior

mirror, when detecting objects thatmay not be visible in the interior andexterior mirrors.Radar sensors for side blind zonealert are located in the rear bumper.

9 Warning

Side blind zone alert does notreplace driver vision.The system does not detect:

● vehicles outside the side blindzones which may be rapidlyapproaching

● pedestrians, cyclists or animalsBefore changing a lane, alwayscheck all mirrors, look over theshoulder and use the turn signal.

When the system detects a vehicle inthe side blind zone while drivingforwards, either while passing avehicle or being passed, the yellowwarning symbol B will illuminate inthe relevant exterior mirror. If thedriver then activates the turn signal,


the warning symbol B starts flashingyellow as a warning not to changelanes.NoticeIf the overtaking vehicle is at least6 mph faster than the vehicle beingovertaken, the warning symbol B inthe relevant exterior mirror may notilluminate.

When the vehicle is started, bothexterior mirror displays will brieflyilluminate to indicate that the systemis operating.

If the vehicle is equipped with lanechange alert 3 216, the symbol Fis displayed in the mirrors.

DeactivationActivation or deactivation of the Sideblind zone alert can be set in thevehicle personalisation menu in theInfo-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.Info-Display 3 119.Deactivation is indicated by amessage in the Driver InformationCentre.

Detection zonesThe detection zones start at the rearbumper and extend approx.three metres rearwards and to thesides. The height of the zone isapprox. between half a metre andtwo metres off the ground.The system is deactivated if thevehicle is towing a trailer or if a bikecarrier is attached.Side blind zone alert is designed toignore stationary objects such asguardrails, posts, curbs, walls andbeams. Parked vehicles or oncomingvehicles are not detected.

System limitationsOccasional missed alerts can occurunder normal circumstances and willincrease in wet conditions.The system may not operate properlywhen:● Ice, snow, mud, stickers,

magnets, metal plates, oranything else covers the sensors.

● Driving in heavy rainstorms.


● The vehicle had an accident or ifthe area surrounding thedetection sensor is damaged ornot properly repaired.

● There are extreme temperaturechanges.

● The vehicle is towing a trailerIn the event of a fault in the system orif the system does not work due totemporary conditions, the symbols inthe mirrors will be permanentlyilluminated and a message isdisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre. Seek the assistance of aworkshop.

Lane change alertAdditional to the side blind zoneassist 3 214, lane change alertrecognizes rapidly approachingvehicles from behind on parallel lanesnext to your vehicle.If the vehicle has lane change alert,then side blind zone alert is alwaysincluded.The system alerts visually in eachexterior mirror when detecting rapidlyapproaching vehicles from behind.

The radar distance sensors arelocated in the rear bumper.

9 Warning

Lane change alert does notreplace driver vision.Before changing a lane, alwayscheck all mirrors, look over theshoulder and use the turn signal.

When the system detects anapproaching vehicle from behindwhich drives considerably faster, theyellow warning symbol F willilluminate in the relevant exteriormirror. If the driver then activates theturn signal, the warning symbol Fstarts flashing yellow as a warning notto change lanes.Lane change alert is active at allspeeds.

When the vehicle is started, bothexterior mirror displays will brieflycome on to indicate that the system isoperating.


Detection zones

The system sensors cover a zone ofapprox. 3.5 metres parallel on bothvehicle sides and approx. 3 metresrearwards on side blind zone alert(A) and approx. 50 metres rearwardson lane change alert (B) on parallellanes. The zones start at eachexterior mirror. The height of the zoneis approx. between 0.5 metres and2 metres off the ground.

DeactivationActivation or deactivation of the lanechange alert can be set in the vehiclepersonalisation menu in the Info-Display.

Vehicle personalisation 3 125.Info-Display 3 119.The system is deactivated if thevehicle is towing a trailer.Deactivation is indicated by amessage in the Driver InformationCentre.

System limitationsOccasional missed alerts can occurunder normal circumstances or insharp curves. The system cantemporarily alert of objects in the blindspot at specific weather conditions(rain, hail etc). Driving on a wet roador in the transitions from a dry area toa wet area can cause the controlindicator F to light up, as watersplash can be interpreted as anobject. Otherwise the control indicatorF may illuminate due to guardrails,signs, trees, shrubs or other immobileobjects. This is normal operation andthe system does not need to beserviced.

The system may not operate properlywhen:● Ice, snow, mud, stickers,


● Driving in heavy rainstorms.● The vehicle had an accident or if

the area surrounding thedetection sensor is damaged ornot properly repaired.


● The vehicle is towing a trailerIn the event of a fault in the system orif the system does not work due totemporary conditions, a message isdisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre. Seek the assistance of aworkshop.NoticeAfter production, the systemrequires a calibration. For optimalperformance, drive as soon aspossible on a straight highway roadwith roadside objects, e.g. guardrailsand barriers for some distance.


Panoramic view systemThis system allows views of thevehicle's surroundings to bedisplayed as a nearly 360° picture inthe Info Display, like a bird's eye view.The system uses four cameras:● rear camera, installed in the

tailgate● front camera, installed in the front

grill below the emblem● side cameras, located at the

bottom of both exterior mirrors.

The screen in the Info Display isdivided into two parts: on the left thereis a view from above the vehicle, and

on the right there is the view from frontor the rear displayed, according to thegear engaged. The parking sensorscomplete the information on the view.

ActivationPanoramic view system is activated:● engaging reverse gear● touching the camera icon ë in

the Info Display● approaching too close to an

object ahead

Functionality

Rear viewRear view displays an image of thearea behind the vehicle on the rightpart of the screen when reverse gearis engaged.A warning triangle 9 may bedisplayed on the screen whenobstacles are detected by the rearsensors of the parking assist. Thistriangle changes from yellow to redand increases in size the closer theobject gets.

The previous content of the InfoDisplay appears when the vehicle isshifted out of reverse gear after ashort delay. To return to the previousdisplay content sooner, press thecamera icon in the Info Display.Driving faster than 7 mph in a forwardgear will deactivate the panoramicsystem also.

Surround viewSurround view displays an image ofthe area surrounding the vehicle fromabove, along with the front or rearcamera views in the Info Display.

Front viewFront view displays an image of thearea in front of the vehicle on the rightpart of the screen. The view displaysafter shifting from reverse gear to aforward gear, or by touching thecamera icon in the Info Display. Frontview also displays objectsautomatically detected within 30 cm.The front view is only displayed up toa speed of 7 mph in a forward gear.


DeactivationPanoramic view system isdeactivated:● driving faster than 7 mph● touching the camera icon ë in

the Info Display● shifting into neutral or P with

automatic transmission.

General information

9 Warning

The panoramic view system doesnot replace driver vision. It will notdisplay children, pedestrians,cyclists, crossing traffic, animals,or any other objects outside of thecamera view areas, e. g. below thebumper, or underneath thevehicle.Do not drive or park the vehicleusing only the panoramic viewsystem.Always check the surrounding ofthe vehicle before driving.

9 Warning

Displayed images may be furtheror closer than they appear. Thearea displayed is limited andobjects that are close to eitheredge of the bumper or under thebumper are not displayed on thescreen.

9 Warning

The panoramic view camerashave blind spot areas and will notdisplay all objects near the edgesof the vehicle. Folding side mirrorsthat are out of position will notdisplay the panoramic viewcorrectly.

Blind spots are represented ashatched areas in the illuminations.Dark areas show the views displayedby the panoramic view system.


System limitations

Caution

For optimal operation of thesystem, it is important to keep thelenses of the cameras in the frontgrille, the housings of outsidemirrors and in the tailgate betweenthe number plate lights alwaysclean. Rinse the lenses with waterand wipe with a soft cloth.Do not clean the lenses with asteam-jet or high-pressure jetcleaner.

The panoramic view system may notoperate properly when:● The surrounding is dark.● The sun or the beam of

headlights is shining directly intothe camera lenses.


fog, rain, or snow.● The camera lenses are blocked

by snow, ice, slush, mud, dirt.● The vehicle is towing a trailer.

● The vehicle had an accident.● There are extreme temperature

changes.

Rear view cameraThe rear view camera assists thedriver when reversing by displaying aview of the area behind the vehicle.The view of the camera is displayedin the Info-Display.

9 Warning

The rear view camera does notreplace driver vision. Note thatobjects that are outside thecamera's field of view and theparking assist sensors, e.g. belowthe bumper or underneath thevehicle, are not displayed.Do not reverse or park the vehicleusing only the rear view camera.Always check the surrounding ofthe vehicle before driving.

ActivationRear view camera is automaticallyactivated when reverse gear isengaged.

Functionality

The camera is mounted between thenumber plate lights.


The area displayed by the camera islimited. The distance of the image thatappears on the display differs fromthe actual distance.

Guiding linesDynamic guiding lines are horizontallines at one metre intervals projectedonto the picture to define the distanceto displayed objects.

Trajectory lane of the vehicle isshown in accordance with thesteering angle.

Warning symbolsWarning symbols are indicated astriangles 9 on the picture, which showobstacles detected by the rearsensors of the advanced parkingassist.Additionally 9 appears on the top lineof the Info-Display with the warning tocheck the vehicle surrounding.

DeactivationThe camera is switched off when acertain forward speed is exceeded orif reverse gear is not engaged forapprox. 10 seconds.

Deactivation of guiding lines andwarning symbols

7'' Colour-Info-Display: Activation ordeactivation of the visual guiding linesand the warning symbols can bechanged via touch buttons in thelower zone of the display.8'' Colour-Info-Display: Activation ordeactivation of the visual guiding linesand the warning symbols can be


changed in the Settings menu in theInfo-Display. Select the relevantsetting in Settings, I Rear Camera.Info-Display 3 119.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.

System limitationsThe rear view camera may notoperate properly when:● The surrounding is dark.● The sun or the beam of

headlights is shining directly intothe camera lenses.


fog, rain, or snow.● The camera lenses are blocked

by snow, ice, slush, mud, dirt.Clean the lense, rinse with water,and wipe with a soft cloth.

● The vehicle is towing a trailer.● The vehicle had a rear end

accident.● There are extreme temperature

changes.

Fault messages are displayed with a9 on the top line of the Info-Display.

Rear cross traffic alertAdditional to the rear view camera3 220, rear cross traffic alert warns ofcross traffic from left or right sidewhen driving rearwards. When crosstraffic is recognized and the rear viewcamera is activated, a warningtriangle with a direction arrow Kappears on the Colour-Info-Display,showing the direction of the traffic.Furthermore, three beeps will soundfrom the speaker on the respectiveside.

The radar distance sensors arelocated in the rear bumper.

9 Warning

The rear cross traffic alert does notreplace driver vision. Note thatobjects that are outside sensors,e.g. below the bumper orunderneath the vehicle, are notdisplayed.Pedestrians, children or animalsare not detected.Do not reverse the vehicle by onlylooking at the Info-Display andcheck the surrounding behind andaround the vehicle beforereversing.

ActivationRear cross traffic alert isautomatically activated together withthe rear view camera when reversegear is engaged.


Detection zones

The system sensors cover a zone ofapprox. 20 metres at 90° to the left orright side behind the vehicle. Rearcross traffic alert is active up to 6 mphand issues alerts within cross traffictravelling between 0 and 22 mph.

DeactivationRear cross traffic alert is deactivatedtogether with the rear view camerawhen a certain forward speed isexceeded or if reverse gear is notengaged for approx. 10 seconds.

Activation or deactivation of the rearcross traffic alert can be set in thevehicle personalisation menu in theInfo-Display.Vehicle personalisation 3 125.Info-Display 3 119.The system is deactivated if thevehicle is towing a trailer.Deactivation is indicated by amessage in the Driver InformationCentre.

System limitationsThe system may not operate properlywhen:● Ice, snow, mud, stickers,


● Driving in heavy rainstorms.● The vehicle had an accident or if

the area surrounding thedetection sensor is damaged ornot properly repaired.


● The vehicle is towing a trailer

In the event of a fault in the system orif the system does not work due totemporary conditions, a message isdisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre. Seek the assistance of aworkshop.

Traffic sign assistantFunctionalityTraffic sign assistant detectsdesignated traffic signs via a frontcamera and displays them in theDriver Information Centre.If the vehicle is equipped with anembedded navigation system, trafficsigns from data maps may beincluded additionally.


Traffic signs, which will be detected,are:Limit and no passing signs● speed limit● no passing● end of speed limit● end of no passing

Road signsBeginning and end of:● city regions (country-specific)● motorways● A-roads● play streets

Add on signs● additional hints to traffic signs● restriction of trailer towing● tractor constraints● wet warning● ice warning● time constraints● distance constraints● direction arrows

Speed limit signs and no passingsigns are displayed in the DriverInformation Centre until the nextspeed limit sign or end of speed limitis detected or up to a defined signtimeout.

Indication of multiple signs on thedisplay is possible.

An exclamation mark in a frameindicates that there is an additionalsign detected which cannot be clearlyidentified by the system.The system operates without loss ofperformance up to a speed of125 mph depending on the lightingconditions. At night the system isactive up to a speed of 100 mph.

Display indicationInformation about the currently validtraffic signs is available on thedesignated traffic sign assistant pagein the Driver Information Centre.


Additionally, the currently valid speedlimit is displayed permanently in thelower line of the Driver InformationCentre. In case a speed limit with addon sign is available, a + symbol isdisplayed in this area.

On Baselevel display, choose InfoMenu ? via MENU and selecttraffic sign assistant page with theadjuster wheel on the turn signal lever3 112.

On Mid- or Uplevel display, chooseInfo Menu via right steering wheelbuttons and press å or ä to selecttraffic sign assistant page 3 112.When another page on the DriverInformation Centre menu wasselected and then traffic signassistant page is chosen again, thelast recognised traffic sign will bedisplayed.

Alert functionThe alert function can be activated ordeactivated in the setting menu of thetraffic sign assistant page.

Once activated and when the trafficsign detection page is currently notdisplayed, newly detected speed limitand no passing signs are displayedas pop-up alerts in the DriverInformation Centre.


On Baselevel Display, when trafficsign assistant page is displayed,press SET/CLR on the turn signallever.

Select Alerts ON or Alerts OFF byturning the adjuster wheel and pressSET/CLR.On Mid- or Uplevel Display, whentraffic sign assistant page isdisplayed, press é on the steeringwheel controls.

Activate alerts by setting J,deactivate alerts by setting I viabutton 9.Pop-up alert is displayed for approx.eight seconds in the DriverInformation Centre.

System resetThe content of the traffic sign displaycan be cleared in the setting menu ofthe traffic sign assistant page byselecting Reset and confirm bypressing SET/CLR on the turn signallever or 9 on the steering wheelcontrols.Alternatively, SET/CLR or 9 can bepressed for three seconds to clear thecontent of the page.Upon successful reset, a chime willsound and the following “DefaultSign” is indicated until the next trafficsign is detected or provided by mapdata of the navigation system.

In some cases, traffic sign assistant iscleared up automatically by thesystem.


Clearing of traffic signsThere are different scenarios thatlead to clearing the currentlydisplayed traffic signs. After clearing,the “Default Sign” or a sign fromnavigation map data is displayed inthe Driver Information Centre.Reasons for signs being cleared:● A predefined distance was driven

or time has elapsed (differs foreach sign type)

● Vehicle drives through a turn● If no navigation map data is

available and speed drops below32 mph (city entry detection)

● If navigation map data isavailable and a city entry/exit wasdetected due to map data change

Traffic sign detection inconjunction with navigationsystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system, the currentlydisplayed sign can either originatefrom optical sign detection or from themap data.

If the currently displayed signoriginates from map data and the mapinformation changes, a new sign willbe displayed. This may lead todetection of a new sign although nosign on the road may have beenpassed.

System limitationsTraffic sign assistant may not operateproperly when:● Vehicle speed is faster than 125

mph.● Driving on winding or hilly roads.● During nighttime driving.● Weather limits visibility, such as



● The sun is shining directly intothe camera lens.

● Traffic signs are completely orpartially covered or difficult todiscern.

● Traffic signs are incorrectlymounted or damaged.

● Traffic signs do not comply withthe Vienna Convention on RoadSigns and Signals (WienerÜbereinkommen überStraßenverkehrszeichen).

Caution

The system is intended to help thedriver within a defined speedrange to discern certain trafficsigns. Do not ignore traffic signswhich are not displayed by thesystem.The system does not discern anyother than the conventional trafficsigns that might give or end aspeed limit.Do not let this special featuretempt you into taking risks whendriving.Always adapt speed to the roadconditions.


The driver assistance systems donot relieve the driver from fullresponsibility for vehicleoperation.

Lane keep assistLane keep assist helps to avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. The front cameraobserves the lane markings betweenwhich the vehicle is driving. If thevehicle approaches a lane marking,the steering wheel is gently turned toposition the vehicle back into the lane.Turn steering wheel in samedirection, if system steering is notsufficient. Turn steering wheel gentlyinto opposite direction, if lane changeis intended.When crossing a lane markingsignificantly, lane keep assist starts avisual and acoustic warning.Unintended lane departure isassumed● without using turn signal● using the turn signal in the

opposite direction of the lanedeparture

● without braking● without acceleration● without active steering.NoticeThe system is switched off duringdetection of ambiguous lanemarkings, e.g. in construction areas.NoticeThe system may be switched off if itdetects lanes which are too narrow,too wide or too curved.

Activation

The lane keep assist is activated bypressing a. The LED in the buttonilluminates to indicate that the systemis switched on.

When the control indicator a in theinstrument cluster or in the head-updisplay illuminates green, the systemis ready to assist.The system is operational at vehiclespeeds between 37 mph and112 mph and if lane markings areavailable.The system gently turns the steeringwheel and the control indicator achanges to yellow, if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal in thatdirection.The system alerts by flashing atogether with three chimes, from therespective direction, if the lane isdeparted significantly.


The system is only operable when alane marking is detected.If the system only detects lanemarkings on one side of the road, itwill only assist for this side.Lane keep assist detects hands-freedriving. In this case a message in theDriver Information Centre pops-upand a chime sounds as long as lanekeep assist detects hands-freedriving.

DeactivationThe system is deactivated bypressing a; the LED in the buttonextinguishes.The system is deactivatedautomatically when a trailer isdetected.

System limitationsThe system performance may notoperate properly when:● Vehicle speed is out of range

from 37 to 112 mph.● Driving on winding or hilly roads.● During nighttime driving.

● Weather limits visibility, such asfog, rain, or snow.

● The sensor in the windscreen isblocked by snow, ice, slush, mud,dirt, windscreen damage oraffected by foreign items, e.g.stickers.

● The sun is shining directly intothe camera lens.

● Close vehicles ahead● Banked roads● Road edges● Roads with poor lane markings● Sudden lighting changes● Vehicle modifications, e.g. tyres.

Switch off the system if the system isdisturbed by tar marks, shadows,road cracks, temporary orconstruction lane markings, or otherroad imperfections.

9 Warning

Always keep your attention on theroad and maintain proper vehicleposition within the lane, otherwisevehicle damage, injury or deathcould occur.Lane keep assist does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.The system may not keep thevehicle in the lane or give an alert,even if a lane marking is detected.The steering of the lane keepassist may not be sufficient toavoid a lane departure.The system may not detect hands-off driving due to externalinfluences (road condition andsurface, weather etc). The driverhas full responsibility to control thevehicle and is always required tokeep the hands on the steeringwheel while driving.Using the system while towing atrailer or on slippery roads couldcause loss of control of the vehicleand a crash. Switch the system off.


FuelFuel for petrol enginesOnly use unleaded fuel that complieswith European standard EN 228 orequivalent.The engine is capable of running withfuel that contains up to 10% ethanol(e.g. named E10).Use fuel with the recommendedoctane rating. A lower octane ratingcan reduce engine power and torqueand slightly increases fuelconsumption.

Caution

Do not use fuel or fuel additivesthat contain metallic compoundssuch as manganese-basedadditives. This may cause enginedamage.

Caution

Use of fuel that does not comply toEN 228 or equivalent can lead todeposits or engine damage.

Caution

Use of fuel with a lower octanerating than the lowest possiblerating could lead to uncontrolledcombustion and engine damage.

The engine specific requirementsregarding octane rating are given inthe engine data overview 3 291. Acountry-specific label at the fuel fillerflap can supersede the requirement.

Fuel additives outside EuropeFuel should contain detergentadditives that help prevent engineand fuel system deposits fromforming. Clean fuel injectors andintake valves will allow the emissioncontrol system to work properly.

Some fuel does not contain sufficientquantities of additive to keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean.To make up for this lack ofdetergency, add Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS to the fuel tank atevery engine oil change or every10,000 miles, whichever occurs first.It is available at your workshop.Fuels containing oxygenates such asethers and ethanol, as well asreformulated fuel, are available insome cities. If these fuels comply withthe previously describedspecification, then they areacceptable to use. However, E85(85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 15% ethanolmust be used only in FlexFuelvehicles.

Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


Some fuels, mainly high octaneracing fuels, can contain an octaneenhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use fuels orfuel additives with MMT as they canreduce spark plug life and affectemission control systemperformance. The malfunctionindicator light Z may turn on 3 107.If this occurs, seek the assistance ofa workshop.

Fuel for diesel enginesOnly use diesel fuel that complieswith EN 590 and which has a sulphurconcentration of max. 10 ppm.Fuels with a biodiesel (compliant withEN 14214) content of max. 7% byvolume may be used (e.g. namedB7).If travelling in countries outside theEuropean Union occasional use ofEuro-Diesel fuel with a sulphurconcentration below 50 ppm ispossible.

Caution

Frequent usage of diesel fuelcontaining more than 15 ppmsulphur will cause severe enginedamage.

Caution

Use of fuel that does not comply toEN 590 or similar can lead toengine powerloss, increased wearor engine damage and may affectyour warranty.

Do not use marine diesel oils, heatingoils, Aquazole and similar diesel-water emulsions. Diesel fuels mustnot be diluted with fuels for petrolengines.

Low temperature operationAt temperatures below 0° C, somediesel products with biodiesel blendsmay clog, freeze or gel, which mayaffect the fuel supply system. Startingand engine operation may not work

properly. Make sure to fill wintergrade diesel fuel at ambienttemperatures below 0°C.Arctic grade diesel fuel can be usedin extreme cold temperatures below-20° C. Using this fuel grade in warmor hot climates is not recommendedand may cause engine stalling, poorstarting or damage on the fuelinjection system.

Refuelling


9 Danger

Before refuelling, switch offignition and any external heaterswith combustion chambers.Follow the operating and safetyinstructions of the filling stationwhen refuelling.

9 Danger

Fuel is flammable and explosive.No smoking. No naked flames orsparks.If you can smell fuel in yourvehicle, have the cause of thisremedied immediately by aworkshop.

Caution

In case of misfuelling, do notswitch on ignition.

Fuel filler flap is located at right rearside of vehicle.

The fuel filler flap can only be openedif the vehicle is unlocked. Release thefuel filler flap by pushing the flap.

Petrol and Diesel refuelling

Place the nozzle in straight position tothe filler neck and press with slightforce to insert.To refuel, fully insert the pump nozzleand switch it on.After the automatic cut-off, the tankcan be topped up by operating thepump nozzle a maximum of two moretimes.

Caution

Wipe off any overflowing fuelimmediately.

Close the flap and allow it to engage.

Misfuel inhibitor

9 Warning

Do not try to open the flap of thefuel filler neck manually onvehicles with misfuel inhibitor.Disregarding this could lead totrapping of the fingers.

All vehicles are equipped with amisfuel inhibitor.


The misfuel inhibitor ensures that theflap of the fuel filler neck can only beopened by using the suitable fuelnozzle or a funnel for emergencyrefilling.In case of an emergency, refill with acanister. A funnel must be used toopen the cap of the filler neck.

The funnel is stowed in the loadcompartment.Place the funnel in straight position tothe filler neck and press with slightforce to insert.Use the funnel to fill in the fuel into thefiller neck.After topping-up, stow the funnel inthe load compartment.

Trailer hitchGeneral informationThe factory-fitted towing equipment isfolded up under the rear bumperfascia.Entrust retrofitting of towingequipment to a workshop. It may benecessary to make changes thataffect the cooling system, heatshields or other equipment. Only usetowing equipment that has beenapproved for your vehicle.To avoid vehicle damage, the powertailgate cannot be operated with theelectronic key when a trailer iselectrically connected.The bulb outage detection function fortrailer brake light cannot detect apartial bulb outage, e.g. in case of fourtimes five watt bulbs, the function onlydetects lamp outage when only asingle five Watt lamp remains or noneremain.Fitting of towing equipment couldcover the opening of the towing eye.If this is the case use the coupling ballbar for towing.


Driving characteristics andtowing tipsBefore attaching a trailer, lubricatethe coupling ball. However, do not doso if a stabiliser, which acts on thecoupling ball, is being used to reducesnaking movements.During trailer towing do not exceed aspeed of 50 mph. A maximum speedof 60 mph is only appropriate if anoscillation damper is used and thepermissible gross trailer weight doesnot exceed the vehicle's kerb weight.For trailers with low driving stabilityand caravan trailers, the use of anoscillation damper is stronglyrecommended.If the trailer starts snaking, drive moreslowly, do not attempt to correct thesteering and brake sharply ifnecessary.When driving downhill, drive in thesame gear as if driving uphill anddrive at a similar speed.Adjust tyre pressure to the valuespecified for full load 3 300.

Trailer towingTrailer loadsThe permissible trailer loads arevehicle and engine-dependentmaximum values which must not beexceeded. The actual trailer load isthe difference between the actualgross weight of the trailer and theactual coupling socket load with thetrailer coupled.The permissible trailer loads arespecified in the vehicle documents. Ingeneral, they are valid for gradientsup to 12%.The permissible trailer load appliesup to the specified incline and at sealevel. Since engine power decreasesas altitude increases due to the airbecoming thinner, therefore reducingclimbing ability, the permissible grosstrain weight also decreases by 10%for every 1000 metres of altitude. Thegross train weight does not have to bereduced when driving on roads withslight inclines (less than 8%, e.g.motorways).

The permissible gross train weightmust not be exceeded. This weight isspecified on the identification plate3 286.

Vertical coupling loadThe vertical coupling load is the loadexerted by the trailer on the couplingball. It can be varied by changing theweight distribution when loading thetrailer.The maximum permissible verticalcoupling load of 60 kg(engines B20DTH / B20NFT: 90 kg) isspecified on the towing equipmentidentification plate and in the vehicledocuments. Always aim for themaximum load, especially in the caseof heavy trailers. The vertical couplingload should never fall below 25 kg.


Rear axle loadWhen the trailer is coupled and thetowing vehicle fully loaded, thepermissible rear axle load (seeidentification plate or vehicledocuments) may be exceeded by70 kg (engines B20DTH: 80 kg), thegross vehicle weight rating must notbe exceeded. If the permissible rearaxle load is exceeded, a maximumspeed of 60 mph applies.

Towing equipment

Caution

The folding coupling ball barcannot be removed from thevehicle. When driving without atrailer, fold in the coupling ball bar.

9 Warning

Make sure that no one is in thepivot zone of the coupling ball bar.Risk of body injury.

When releasing the stowedcoupling ball bar, make sure tostand left of the grip.

Release stowed coupling ball bar

Pull the grip located left to the numberplate under the rear bumper fascia atan angle of approx. 45° to the ground.

A buzzing tone sounds as a warningwhen the release handle is pulled outand the ball neck is disengaged.Take the released coupling ball barand raise it up until it engages.Ensure the coupling ball bar iscorrectly engaged and the releasedhandle is guided back to its hiddeninitial position, otherwise the buzzingtone will not stop.


Stow/hide coupling ball bar

Pull the grip located left of the numberplate under the rear bumper fascia atan angle of approx. 45° to the ground.

A buzzing tone sounds as a warningwhen the release handle is pulled outand the ball neck is disengaged.

With the flat of the hand, swivel thereleased coupling ball bar to the rightuntil it engages under the floor. Makesure that the release handle is back inits hidden initial position, otherwisethe buzzing tone will not stop.

9 Warning

Towing a trailer is permitted onlywhen the coupling ball bar is fittedcorrectly. If the coupling ball bardoes not engage correctly or if the

release handle is impossible toguide to its hidden initial position inthe housing or if the buzzing tonesounds after engaging thecoupling ball bar, seek theassistance of a workshop.

Eye for break-away stopping cableAttach break-away stopping cable toeye.

Trailer stability assistIf the system detects snakingmovements, engine power is reducedand the vehicle/trailer combination isselectively braked until the snakingceases. While the system is workingkeep steering wheel as still aspossible.Trailer stability assistant is a functionof the Electronic Stability Control3 182.

Vehicle care 237

Vehicle care

General Information ................... 237Accessories and vehiclemodifications .......................... 237

Vehicle storage ........................ 238End-of-life vehicle recovery ..... 238

Vehicle checks ........................... 239Performing work ...................... 239Bonnet ..................................... 239Engine oil ................................. 240Engine coolant ......................... 241Washer fluid ............................ 242Brakes ..................................... 242Brake fluid ............................... 242Vehicle battery ......................... 243Diesel fuel system bleeding ..... 244Wiper blade replacement ........ 244

Bulb replacement ....................... 245Halogen headlights .................. 245LED headlights ........................ 247Fog lights ................................. 247Tail lights ................................. 249Side turn signal lights .............. 254Number plate light ................... 255Interior lights ............................ 255Instrument panel illumination ... 255

Electrical system ........................ 255Fuses ....................................... 255Engine compartment fuse box . 256Instrument panel fuse box ....... 259

Vehicle tools .............................. 260Tools ........................................ 260

Wheels and tyres ....................... 261Winter tyres ............................. 261Tyre designations .................... 262Tyre pressure .......................... 262Tyre pressure monitoringsystem .................................... 263

Tread depth ............................. 265Changing tyre and wheel size . 266Wheel covers ........................... 266Tyre chains .............................. 266Tyre repair kit .......................... 267Wheel changing ....................... 271Spare wheel ............................ 274

Jump starting ............................. 276Towing ....................................... 277

Towing the vehicle ................... 277Towing another vehicle ........... 278

Appearance care ....................... 279Exterior care ............................ 279Interior care ............................. 281

General InformationAccessories and vehiclemodificationsWe recommend the use of genuineparts and accessories and factoryapproved parts specific for yourvehicle type. We cannot assess orguarantee reliability of other products- even if they have a regulatory orotherwise granted approval.Any modification, conversion or otherchanges made to standard vehiclespecifications (including, withoutlimitation, software modifications,modifications of the electronic controlunits) may invalidate the warrantyoffered by Vauxhall. Furthermore,such changes may impact fuelconsumption, CO2 emissions andother emissions of the vehicle andcause the vehicle to no longerconform to the operating permit,impacting the validity of your vehicleregistration.

238 Vehicle care

Caution

When transporting the vehicle ona train or on a recovery vehicle, themud flaps might be damaged.

Vehicle storageStorage for a long period of timeIf the vehicle is to be stored for severalmonths:● Wash and wax the vehicle.● Have the wax in the engine

compartment and underbodychecked.

● Clean and preserve the rubberseals.

● Fill up fuel tank completely.● Change the engine oil.● Drain the washer fluid reservoir.● Check the coolant antifreeze and

corrosion protection.● Adjust tyre pressure to the value

specified for full load.

● Park the vehicle in a dry, wellventilated place. Engage first orreverse gear or set selector leverto P. Prevent the vehicle fromrolling.

● Do not apply the parking brake.● Open the bonnet, close all doors

and lock the vehicle.● Disconnect the clamp from the

negative terminal of the vehiclebattery. Beware that all systemsare not functional, e.g. anti-theftalarm system.

Putting back into operationWhen the vehicle is to be put back intooperation:● Connect the clamp to the

negative terminal of the vehiclebattery. Activate the electronicsof the power windows.

● Check tyre pressure.● Fill up the washer fluid reservoir.● Check the engine oil level.● Check the coolant level.● Fit the number plate if necessary.

End-of-life vehicle recoveryInformation on end-of-life vehiclerecovery centres and the recycling ofend-of-life vehicles is available on ourwebsite, where legally required. Onlyentrust this work to an authorisedrecycling centre.

Vehicle care 239

Vehicle checksPerforming work

9 Warning

Only perform engine compartmentchecks when the ignition is off.The cooling fan may startoperating even if the ignition is off.

9 Danger

The ignition system usesextremely high voltage. Do nottouch.

BonnetOpening

Pull the release lever and return it toits original position.

Move the safety catch sideways to theleft vehicle side and open the bonnet.The bonnet is held openautomatically.If the bonnet is opened during anAutostop, the engine will be restartedautomatically for safety reasons.Stop-start system 3 165.

ClosingLower the bonnet and let it fall into thelatch. Check that the bonnet isengaged.

240 Vehicle care

Caution

Do not press the bonnet into thelatch to avoid dents.

Active bonnet 3 69.

Engine oilCheck the engine oil level manuallyon a regular basis to prevent damageto the engine. Ensure that the correctspecification of oil is used.Recommended fluids and lubricants3 283.The maximum engine oilconsumption is 0.6 litres per600 miles.Check with the vehicle on a levelsurface. The engine must be atoperating temperature and switchedoff for at least five minutes.

Caution

It is the owner's responsibility tomaintain the proper level of anappropriate quality oil in theengine.

Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean,reinsert fully, pull out and read theengine oil level.

Different dipsticks are useddepending on engine variant.

Vehicle care 241

We recommend the use of the samegrade of engine oil that was used atlast change.

When the engine oil level hasdropped to the MIN mark, top upengine oil.The engine oil level must not exceedthe MAX mark on the dipstick.

Caution

Wipe off any spilled engine oilimmediately.

Caution

Overfilled engine oil must bedrained or suctioned out.

Capacities 3 299.Fit the cap on straight and tighten it.

Engine coolantThe coolant provides freezeprotection down to approx. -28 °C. Incold regions with very lowtemperatures, the factory filledcoolant provides frost protectiondown to approx. -37 °C.

Caution

Only use approved antifreeze.

Coolant and antifreeze 3 283.

Coolant level

Caution

Too low a coolant level can causeengine damage.

If the cooling system is cold, thecoolant level should be above thefilling line mark. Top up if the level islow.

242 Vehicle care

Depending on the engine, theposition of the coolant container maybe different.

9 Warning

Allow the engine to cool beforeopening the cap. Carefully openthe cap, relieving the pressureslowly.

To top up, use a 1:1 mixture ofreleased coolant concentrate mixedwith clean tap water. If no coolantconcentrate is available, use cleantap water. Install the cap tightly. Havethe coolant concentration checkedand have the cause of the coolantloss remedied by a workshop.

Washer fluid

Fill with clean water mixed with asuitable quantity of approvedwindscreen washer fluid whichcontains antifreeze.

Caution

Only washer fluid with a sufficientantifreeze concentration providesprotection at low temperatures ora sudden drop in temperature.

Washer fluid 3 283.

BrakesIn the event of minimum thickness ofthe brake lining, a squealing noisesounds during braking.Continued driving is possible buthave the brake lining replaced assoon as possible.Once new brake linings are installed,do not brake unnecessarily hard forthe first few journeys.

Brake fluid

9 Warning

Brake fluid is poisonous andcorrosive. Avoid contact with eyes,skin, fabrics and painted surfaces.

Vehicle care 243

The brake fluid level must be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks.If fluid level is below MIN seek theassistance of a workshop.Brake and clutch fluid 3 283.

Vehicle batteryThe vehicle battery is maintenance-free provided that the driving profileallows sufficient charging of thebattery. Short-distance-driving andfrequent engine starts can dischargethe battery. Avoid the use ofunnecessary electrical consumers.

Batteries do not belong in householdwaste. They must be disposed of atan appropriate recycling collectionpoint.Laying up the vehicle for more thanfour weeks can lead to batterydischarge. Disconnect the clamp fromthe negative terminal of the vehiclebattery.Ensure the ignition is switched offbefore connecting or disconnectingthe vehicle battery.Battery discharge protection 3 146.

Disconnecting the batteryIf the vehicle's battery is to bedisconnected (e.g. for maintenancework), the alarm siren must bedeactivated as follows: Switch theignition on then off, then disconnectthe vehicle's battery within15 seconds.

Replacing the vehicle batteryNoticeAny deviation from the instructionsgiven in this section may lead totemporary deactivation ordisturbance of the stop-start system.

When the vehicle battery is beingreplaced, please ensure that thereare no open ventilation holes in thevicinity of the positive terminal. If aventilation hole is open in this area, itmust be closed off with a dummy cap,and the ventilation in the vicinity of thenegative terminal must be opened.We recommend that you have thevehicle battery replaced by aworkshop.Stop-start system 3 165.

Charging the vehicle battery

9 Warning

On vehicles with stop-startsystem, ensure that the chargingpotential does not exceed

244 Vehicle care

14.6 volts when using a batterycharger. Otherwise the vehiclebattery might be damaged.

Jump starting 3 276.

Warning label

Meaning of symbols:● No sparks, naked flames or

smoking.● Always shield eyes. Explosive

gases can cause blindness orinjury.

● Keep the vehicle battery out ofreach of children.

● The vehicle battery containssulphuric acid which could causeblindness or serious burninjuries.

● See the Owner's Manual forfurther information.

● Explosive gas may be present inthe vicinity of the vehicle battery.

Diesel fuel system bleedingIf the tank has been run dry, the dieselfuel system must be bled. Switch onthe ignition three times for15 seconds at a time. Then crank theengine for a maximum of40 seconds. Repeat this process afterno less than five seconds. If theengine fails to start, seek theassistance of a workshop.

Wiper blade replacement

Lift the wiper arm until it stays in theraised position. Lift retaining clip todisengage the wiper blade andremove.Attach the wiper blade slightly angledto the wiper arm and push until itengages.Lower wiper arm carefully.

Vehicle care 245

Wiper blade on the rear window

Grand Sport

Lift the wiper arm until it stays in theraised position, press button todisengage the wiper blade andremove.Attach the wiper blade slightly angledto the wiper arm and push until itengages.Lower wiper arm carefully.


Lift wiper arm. Disengage wiper bladeas shown in illustration and remove.Attach the wiper blade slightly angledto the wiper arm and push until itengages.Lower wiper arm carefully.

Bulb replacementSwitch off the ignition and switch offthe relevant switch or close the doors.Only hold a new bulb at the base. Donot touch the bulb glass with barehands.Use only the same bulb type forreplacement.Replace headlight bulbs from withinthe engine compartment.

Bulb checkAfter a bulb replacement switch onthe ignition, operate and check thelights.

Halogen headlightsHalogen headlights with separatebulbs for low beam and high beam.

246 Vehicle care

Low beam (1) outer bulb.High beam (2) inner bulb.

Low beam (1)

1. Rotate the cap anticlockwise andremove it.

2. Disengage bulb holder bypressing the retainer to the front.Withdraw the bulb holder from thereflector housing.

3. Detach the bulb from the bulbholder and replace the bulb.

4. Insert the bulb holder.5. Fit the cap and rotate clockwise.

Vehicle care 247

High beam (2)

1. Rotate the cap anticlockwise andremove it.

2. Disengage bulb holder bypressing the retainer to the front.Withdraw the bulb holder from thereflector housing.

3. Detach the bulb from the bulbholder and replace the bulb.

4. Insert the bulb holder.5. Fit the cap and rotate clockwise.

Front turn signal lightIn case of defective LEDs, have themreplaced by a workshop.

Side lightIn case of defective LEDs, have themreplaced by a workshop.

Daytime running lightIn case of defective LEDs, have themreplaced by a workshop.

LED headlightsHeadlights for low and high beam,sidelights, daytime running lights andturn signal lights are designed asLEDs and cannot be changed.Have lights repaired by a workshop incase of failure.

Fog lights1. Grand Sport, Sports Tourer

248 Vehicle care

Disengage the cover with ascrewdriver in the recess andremove the cover.Country Tourer

Undo the screw.

2. Grand Sport, Sports Tourer

Undo screw and remove thefaceplate.Country Tourer

Lever out the faceplate with ascrewdriver in the recess andremove the faceplate.

3. Undo three screws and removethe light assembly to the front.

Vehicle care 249

4. Turn the bulb socketanticlockwise and remove it fromthe light assembly.

5. Disengage the plug connector bypressing the retaining lug.

6. Remove and replace the bulb unitand attach the plug connector.Note that the bulb and the socketare one unit and have to bechanged together.

7. Insert the bulb socket into the lightassembly by turning clockwiseand engage.

8. Mount the light assembly bytightening the three screws.

9. Attach the faceplate and tightenthe screw.

10. Grand Sport, Sports TourerAttach and engage the cover.

Tail lightsTail lights and brake lights aredesigned as LEDs. In case of failure,have LEDs replaced by a workshop.Turn signal lights, rear fog lights andreverse lights are designed for bulbsand can be changed as follows.

Grand Sport

Light assembly in the body

1. Remove the cover on therespective side.

2. Unscrew the two plastic securingnuts from the inside by hand.

250 Vehicle care

3. Carefully withdraw tail lightassembly from recess andremove. Take care that the cableduct remains in position.

4. Turn the turn signal light bulbsocket anticlockwise and removeit from the light assembly.

5. Remove and replace the turnsignal light bulb.

6. Attach the bulb socket to the lightassembly.

7. Attach the light assembly to thevehicle body and tighten thesecuring nuts from the inside ofthe load compartment. Attachcover.

Light assembly in the tailgate

1. Release the cover in the tailgateand remove it.

2. Unscrew the plastic securing nutby hand.

Vehicle care 251

3. Carefully withdraw the lightassembly from the recesses andremove. Take care that the cableduct remains in position.

4. Turn the bulb socketanticlockwise and remove it fromthe light assembly.Rear fog light (1)Reverse light (2)

5. Detach the bulb from the bulbsocket and replace the bulb.

Rear fog light

Reverse light6. Insert the bulb socket into the tail

light assembly. Fit light assemblyon the tailgate and tighten thescrew from the inside. Attachcover.

252 Vehicle care


Light assembly in the body

1. Open the covers with screwdriver.Unscrew and remove bothscrews.

2. Carefully withdraw tail lightassembly from recess andremove. Take care that the cableduct remains in position.

3. Turn the turn signal light bulbsocket anticlockwise and removeit from the light assembly.

4. Detach the bulb from the bulbsocket and replace the turn signallight bulb.

5. Attach the bulb socket to the lightassembly.

6. Attach the light assembly to thevehicle body and tighten thescrews. Close covers.

Vehicle care 253

Light assembly in the tailgate

1. Release the cover in the tailgateand remove it.

2. Unscrew the plastic securing nutby hand.

3. Carefully withdraw the lightassembly from the recesses andremove. Take care that the cableduct remains in position.

4. Turn the bulb socketanticlockwise and remove it fromthe light assembly.Rear fog light (1)Reverse light (2)

5. Detach the bulb from the bulbsocket and replace the bulb.

Rear fog light

254 Vehicle care

Reverse light6. Insert the bulb socket into the tail

light assembly. Fit light assemblyon the tailgate and tighten thescrew from the inside. Attachcover.

Side turn signal lightsTo replace bulb, remove lamphousing:

1. Slide lamp to its left side andremove with its right end.

2. Turn bulb holder anticlockwiseand remove from housing.

3. Pull bulb from bulb holder andreplace it.

Vehicle care 255

4. Insert bulb holder and turnclockwise.

5. Insert left end of the lamp, slide tothe left and insert right end.

Number plate lightThe number plate light is designed asLEDs and can not be changed. Incase of defective LEDs, have themreplaced by a workshop.

Interior lightsCourtesy light, reading lightsHave bulbs replaced by a workshop.

Load compartment lightHave bulbs replaced by a workshop.

Instrument panelilluminationHave bulbs replaced by a workshop.

Electrical systemFusesData on the replacement fuse mustmatch the data on the defective fuse.There are three fuse boxes in thevehicle:● engine compartment● instrument panel

Before replacing a fuse, turn off therespective switch and the ignition.A blown fuse can be recognised by itsmelted wire.

Caution

Do not replace the fuse until thecause of the fault has beenremedied.

Some functions are protected byseveral fuses.Fuses may also be inserted withoutexistence of a function. Fuse extractor

A fuse extractor may be located in thefuse box in the engine compartment.

256 Vehicle care

Place the fuse extractor on thevarious types of fuse from the top orside, and withdraw fuse.

Engine compartment fusebox

The fuse box is in the front left of theengine compartment.Disengage the cover and remove it.

Vehicle care 257

No. Circuit

1 –

2 –

3 ABS

4 –

5 –

6 Tailgate

7 Fog light

8 Memory module

9 Heated windscreen

10 Seat lumbar

11 DC/DC battery

12 Heated rear window

13 Heated mirror

14 –

15 –

16 Front wiper

17 Power seat, passenger

No. Circuit

18 Sunblind

19 Power seat, driver

20 –

21 Sunroof

22 Rear wiper/Airbag

23 Adaptive forward lighting

24 –

25 –

26 Transmission control module

27 Ignition/Instrument panel

28 –

29 Rear view camera/Air vent

30 Malfunction indicator light/Trailer

31 –

32 Camera

33 Seat heat front

34 Seat heat rear

No. Circuit

35 Damping/All-wheel drive

36 Fuel system

37 –

38 –

39 –

40 Steering wheel lock

41 –

42 –

43 Heated steering wheel

44 Headlight range adjustment

45 –

46 Engine control module

47 –

48 DC/DC converter/Air vent/E-Boost

49 Rear door control module

50 –

51 –

258 Vehicle care

No. Circuit

52 –

53 –

54 –

55 –

56 Starter

57 –

58 –

59 Left headlight (LED)

60 Cooling fan

61 –

62 –

63 –

64 –

65 Climate control

66 –

67 –

68 –

No. Circuit

69 Right high beam (Halogen)/Right headlight (LED)

70 Left high beam (Halogen)

71 –

72 Starter

73 –



76 Exhaust reduction system

77 –

78 Horn

79 Washer system

80 –


82 –

83 Ignition coil

84 Ignition coil

85 Powertrain

No. Circuit

86 –

87 Diesel fuel heating

88 Air shutter

89 –

90 –

91 –

92 After boil pump

93 Electronic key system

94 –

95 Coolant pump

96 Diesel fuel heating

97 –

98 –

99 Coolant pump

After having changed defective fuses,close the fuse box cover and pressuntil it engages.If the fuse box cover is not closedcorrectly, malfunction may occur.

Vehicle care 259

Instrument panel fuse box

In left-hand drive vehicles, the fusebox is behind a cover in theinstrument panel.Disengage cover at the side andremove.

In right-hand drive vehicles, the fusebox is located behind a cover in theglovebox. Open the glovebox andremove the cover.

No. Circuit

1 Left power window

2 Right power window

3 Body control module

4 Climate control fan


6 Trailer provisions

7 Rear seat power folding



10 Head-up display

11 NOx reduction/Pipe heater

12 NOx reduction/Soot sensor

13 UREA module

14 Heated steering wheel


16 Amplifier

17 Alarm

260 Vehicle care

No. Circuit


19 UREA module




23 Electric steering wheel lock

24 Airbag

25 Diagnostic connector

26 Power outlet load compartment

27 EBCM valve

28 Police provision

29 –

30 –

31 Steering wheel controls

32 Ignition switch

33 Climate control

34 Central gateway module

No. Circuit

35 AUX/USB connector

36 Wireless charger

37 Rear wiper

38 Onstar

39 Display

40 Parking assist

41 Overhead console

42 Radio

Vehicle toolsToolsVehicles with spare wheel

The jack with wheel wrench, the tools,an extension bolt for securing adamaged wheel and the towing eyeare placed in the tool box below thespare wheel in the load compartment.Spare wheel 3 274.

Vehicle care 261

Vehicles without spare wheel

The screwdriver and the towing eyeare located in a box below the floorcover in the load compartment.Tyre repair kit 3 267.

Vehicles with audio speaker system

The screwdriver and the towing eyeare located below the floor cover inthe load compartment, beside theround speaker system component.Tyre repair kit 3 267.

Wheels and tyres

Tyre condition, wheel conditionDrive over edges slowly and at rightangles if possible. Driving over sharpedges can cause tyre and wheeldamage. Do not trap tyres on the kerbwhen parking.Regularly check the wheels fordamage. Seek the assistance of aworkshop in the event of damage orunusual wear.

Winter tyresWinter tyres improve driving safety attemperatures below 7 °C and shouldtherefore be fitted on all wheels.In accordance with country-specificregulations, affix the speed sticker inthe driver's field of view.All tyre sizes are permitted as wintertyres 3 300.

262 Vehicle care

Tyre designationsE.g. 215/60 R 16 95 V215 : tyre width, mm60 : cross-section ratio (tyre height

to tyre width), %R : belt type: RadialRF : type: RunFlat16 : wheel diameter, inches95 : load index e.g. 95 is equivalent

to 690 kgV : speed code letter

Speed code letter:Q : up to 100 mphS : up to 112 mphT : up to 118 mphH : up to 130 mphV : up to 150 mphW : up to 168 mph

Choose a tyre appropriate for themaximum speed of your vehicle.The maximum speed is achievable atkerb weight with driver (75 kg) plus125 kg payload. Optional equipmentcould reduce the maximum speed ofthe vehicle.Performance 3 293.

Directional tyresDirectional tyres should be mountedso that they rotate in the correctdirection. The proper rotationdirection is indicated by a symbol(e.g. an arrow) on the sidewall.

Tyre pressureCheck the pressure of cold tyres atleast every 14 days and before anylong journey. Do not forget the sparewheel. This also applies to vehicleswith tyre pressure monitoring system.

Tyre pressure 3 300.

The tyre pressure information labelon the left door frame indicates theoriginal equipment tyres and thecorrespondent tyre pressures.The tyre pressure data refers to coldtyres. It applies to summer and wintertyres.Always inflate the spare tyre to thepressure specified for full load.The ECO tyre pressure serves toachieve the smallest amount of fuelconsumption possible.Make sure tyre loading settingmatches the current tyre pressure.Tyre loading 3 263.Incorrect tyre pressures will impairsafety, vehicle handling, comfort andfuel economy and will increase tyrewear.Tyre pressures differ depending onvarious options. For the correct tyrepressure value, follow the procedurebelow:1. Identify drive axle and body style.2. Identify the engine identifier code.

Engine data 3 291.3. Identify the respective tyre.

Vehicle care 263

The tyre pressure tables show allpossible tyre combinations 3 300.For the tyres approved for yourvehicle, refer to the EEC Certificate ofConformity provided with your vehicleor other national registrationdocuments.The driver is responsible for correctadjustment of tyre pressure.

9 Warning

If the pressure is too low, this canresult in considerable tyre warm-up and internal damage, leading totread separation and even to tyreblow-out at high speeds.

9 Warning

For specific tyres therecommended tyre pressure asshown in the tyre pressure tablemay exceed the maximum tyrepressure as indicated on the tyre.Never exceed the maximum tyrepressure as indicated on the tyre.

After adjusting tyre pressure, selectthe according tyre loading setting onthe page Tyre load in the DriverInformation Centre, 3 112.

Temperature dependencyThe tyre pressure depends on thetemperature of the tyre. Duringdriving, tyre temperature andpressure increase. Tyre pressurevalues provided on the tyreinformation label and tyre pressurechart are valid for cold tyres, whichmeans at 20 °C.The pressure increases by nearly1.5 psi for a 10 °C temperatureincrease. This must be consideredwhen warm tyres are checked.The tyre pressure value displayed inthe Driver Information Centre showsthe real tyre pressure. A cooled downtyre will show a decreased value,which does not indicate an air leak.

Tyre pressure monitoringsystemThe tyre pressure monitoring systemchecks the pressure of all four wheelsonce a minute when vehicle speedexceeds a certain limit.

Caution

Tyre pressure monitoring systemwarns just about low tyre pressurecondition and does not replaceregular tyre maintenance by thedriver.

All wheels must be equipped withpressure sensors and the tyres musthave the prescribed pressure.NoticeIn countries where the tyre pressuremonitoring system is legallyrequired, the use of wheels withoutpressure sensors will invalidate thevehicle operating permit.

Select the Tyre pressure monitoringpage under the Info Menu in theDriver Information Centre 3 112.

264 Vehicle care

System status and pressure warningsare displayed by a messageindicating the corresponding tyre inthe Driver Information Centre.The system considers the tyretemperature and the tyre loadingsetting for the warnings.Tyre loading setting, see below in thischapter.Temperature dependency 3 262.

A detected low tyre pressurecondition is indicated by the controlindicator w 3 109.If w illuminates, stop as soon aspossible and inflate the tyres asrecommended 3 300.Ensure that vehicle loading statusmatches selected tyre pressure.Vehicle loading status, see below inthis chapter.After inflating, some driving may berequired to update the tyre pressurevalues in the Driver InformationCentre. During this time w maycontinue to illuminate.If w illuminates at lower temperaturesand extinguishes after some driving,this could be an indicator forapproaching a low tyre pressurecondition. Check tyre pressure.Vehicle messages 3 123.Only mount wheels with pressuresensors, otherwise the tyre pressurewill not be displayed and willuminates continuously.A spare wheel or temporary sparewheel is not equipped with pressuresensors. The tyre pressure

monitoring system is not operationalfor these wheels. Control indicator willuminates. For the further threewheels the system remainsoperational.The use of commercially availableliquid tyre repair kits can impair thefunction of the system. Factory-approved repair kits can be used.Operating electronic devices or beingclose to facilities using similar wavefrequencies could disrupt the tyrepressure monitoring system.Each time the tyres are replaced tyrepressure monitoring system sensorsmust be dismounted and serviced.For the screwed sensor replace valvecore and sealing ring, for clippedsensor replace complete valve stem.Use only original plastic valve caps toprotect valve on any damage.

Caution

Do not use metal valve caps asthey lead to valve oxidation anddamage.

Vehicle care 265

Vehicle loading statusAdjust tyre pressure to load conditionaccording tyre information label ortyre pressure chart 3 300, and selectthe appropriate setting in the Tyreloading page under the Settingsmenu in the Driver Information Centre3 112. This setting determines thereference pressures for the tyrepressure warnings.Depending on the display, the menuTyre loading only appears if thevehicle is at a standstill and theparking brake is applied. On vehicleswith automatic transmission theselector lever must be in P.

Select:● Light for comfort pressure up to

3 people.● Eco for Eco pressure up to

3 people.● Max for full loading.

Auto learn functionAfter changing wheels or wheelpositions the vehicle must bestationary for approx. 20 minutes,before the system recalculates. Thefollowing relearn process takes up to10 minutes of driving in a speed rangeof 25 to 60 mph. Avoid to drive outsideof this range for a longer time. Ifpossible, use a country road or similarwhich allows continuous driving.During relearn process $ can bedisplayed or pressure values canswap in the Driver Information Centre.If problems occur during the relearnprocess, a failure message isdisplayed in the Driver InformationCentre. w will flash for 60 secondsand then illuminate continuously.

If this happens, repeat learningprocess. Keep your vehicle stationaryfor approx. 20 minutes and then driveagain for 10 minutes as describedabove.

Tread depthCheck tread depth at regularintervals.Tyres should be replaced for safetyreasons at a tread depth of 2-3 mm(4 mm for winter tyres).For safety reasons, it isrecommended that the tread depth ofthe tyres on one axle should not varyby more than 2 mm.

266 Vehicle care

The legally permissible minimumtread depth (1.6 mm) has beenreached when the tread has worndown as far as one of the tread wearindicators (TWI). Their position isindicated by markings on thesidewall.If there is more wear at the front thanthe rear, swap round front wheels andrear wheels periodically. Ensure thatthe direction of rotation of the wheelsremains the same.Tyres age, even if they are not used.We recommend tyre replacementevery 6 years.

Changing tyre and wheelsizeIf tyres of a different size than thosefitted at the factory are used, it may benecessary to reprogramme thespeedometer as well as the nominaltyre pressure and make other vehiclemodifications.

After converting to a different tyresize, have the label with tyrepressures replaced and the tyredeflation detection systemreinitialised. 3 263

9 Warning

The use of unsuitable tyres orwheels may lead to accidents andwill invalidate the vehicleoperating permit.

Wheel coversWheel covers and tyres that arefactory approved for the respectivevehicle and comply with all of therelevant wheel and tyre combinationrequirements must be used.If the wheel covers and tyres used arenot factory approved, the tyres mustnot have a rim protection ridge.Wheel covers must not impair brakecooling.

9 Warning

Use of unsuitable tyres or wheelcovers could lead to suddenpressure loss and therebyaccidents.

Vehicles with steel wheels: Whenusing locking wheel nuts, do notattach wheel covers.

Tyre chains

Tyre chains are only permitted on thefront wheels.

Vehicle care 267

Always use fine mesh chains that addno more than 10 mm to the tyre treadand the inboard sides (including chainlock).

9 Warning

Damage may lead to tyre blowout.

Tyre chains are only permitted ontyres of size 215/60 R16, 215/55 R17,225/55 R17 and 235/45 R18.Temporary spare wheelThe use of tyre chains is not permittedon the temporary spare wheel.

Tyre repair kitMinor damage to the tyre tread can berepaired with the tyre repair kit.Do not remove foreign bodies fromthe tyres.Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or thatis at tyre's side wall cannot berepaired with the tyre repair kit.

9 Warning

Do not drive faster than 50 mph.Do not use for a lengthy period.Steering and handling may beaffected.

Two types of tyre repair kit areavailable:

● Type 1 indicated by the on/offswitch at the top of thecompressor.

● Type 2 indicated by the on/offswitch at the side of thecompressor.

If vehicle has a flat tyre:Apply the parking brake and engagefirst gear, reverse gear or P.

268 Vehicle care

On vehicles with audio speakersystem, the tyre repair kit is stowedtogether with the tools.

On other versions, the tyre repair kitis stored in a bag.Loosen the screw and remove thebag.

Take the sealant bottle and thecompressor out of the box.

1. Remove the electrical connectioncable and air hose from thestowage compartments on theunderside of the compressor.

Vehicle care 269

2. Type 1: screw the compressor airhose to the connection on thesealant bottle and fit the sealantbottle into the retainer on thecompressor.

Type 2: remove screw plug fromthe compressor and from thesealant bottle. Screw the bottle onthe compressor without removingthe tinfoil from the bottle.

3. Set the compressor near the tyrein such a way that the sealantbottle is upright.

4. Unscrew valve cap from defectivetyre.

5. Type 1: screw the filler hose to thetyre valve.

Type 2: remove protection capfrom filler hose and screw the fillerhose to the tyre valve. The air

release valve must be closed (turnclockwise).

6. The switch on the compressormust be set to J.

7. Connect the compressor plug tothe power outlet or cigarettelighter socket.To avoid discharging the battery,we recommend running theengine.

8. Set the rocker switch on thecompressor to I. The tyre is filledwith sealant.

270 Vehicle care

9. The compressor pressure gaugebriefly indicates up to 6 bar whilstthe sealant bottle is emptying(approx. 30 seconds). Then thepressure starts to drop.

10. All of the sealant is pumped intothe tyre. Then the tyre is inflated.

11. The prescribed tyre pressureshould be obtained within10 minutes. Tyre pressure3 300. When the correct pressureis obtained, switch off thecompressor.Do not run the compressor longerthan 10 minutes.Type 1: if the tyre pressure is notobtained within 10 minutes,remove the tyre repair kit. Movethe vehicle one tyre rotation.Reattach the tyre repair kit andcontinue the filling procedure for10 minutes. Check tyre pressureonce more. If the prescribed tyrepressure is still not obtained, thetyre is too badly damaged. Seekthe assistance of a workshop.

If the pressure is obtained within10 minutes, correct to theprescribed tyre pressure by usingthe compressor to increase ordecrease with the button over thepressure indicator.Type 2: remove tyre repair kit anddrive immediately up to 6 miles,but not longer than 10 minutes.Check tyre pressure once more. Ifthe tyre pressure is not obtained,reattach the tyre repair kit andcontinue the filling procedure for10 minutes. If the prescribed tyrepressure is still not obtained, thetyre is too badly damaged. Seekthe assistance of a workshop.

If the pressure is obtained, correctto the prescribed tyre pressure byusing the compressor to increaseor decrease by opening the airrelease valve (turn anticlockwise)at the air filler hose.

12. Detach the tyre repair kit.Type 1: push catch on bracket toremove sealant bottle frombracket. Screw tyre inflation hoseto the free connection of sealantbottle. This prevents sealant fromescaping.Type 2: Sealant bottle can not beremoved from the compressor.Have the sealant bottle replacedby your workshop.

13. Stow tyre repair kit in the loadcompartment.

14. Remove any excess sealantusing a cloth.

15. Take the label indicatingmaximum permitted speed fromthe sealant bottle and affix in thedriver's field of view.

16. Continue driving immediately sothat sealant is evenly distributedin the tyre. After driving approx.

Vehicle care 271

6 miles (but no more than10 minutes), stop and check tyrepressure. Screw compressor airhose directly onto tyre valve.

If tyre pressure is more than1.3 bar, set it to the correct value.Repeat the procedure until thereis no more loss of pressure.If the tyre pressure has fallenbelow 1.3 bar, the vehicle mustnot be used. Seek the assistanceof a workshop.

17. Stow away tyre repair kit in thebox.

18. Fix the box with the screw.

NoticeThe driving characteristics of therepaired tyre is severely affected,therefore have this tyre replaced.If unusual noise is heard or thecompressor becomes hot, turncompressor off for at least 30minutes.The built-in safety valve opens at apressure of 7 bar.Note the expiry date of the kit. Afterthis date its sealing capability is nolonger guaranteed. Pay attention tostorage information on sealantbottle.Replace the used sealant bottle.Dispose of the bottle as prescribedby applicable laws.The compressor and sealant can beused from approx. -30 °C.The adapters supplied can be usedto pump up other items e.g.footballs, air mattresses, inflatabledinghies etc. They are located on theunderside of the compressor. Toremove, screw on compressor airhose and withdraw adapter.

Wheel changingSome vehicles are equipped with atyre repair kit instead of a spare wheel3 267.Make the following preparations andobserve the following information:● Park the vehicle on a level, firm

and non-skid surface. The frontwheels must be in the straight-ahead position.

● Apply the parking brake andengage first gear, reverse gear orP.

● Remove the spare wheel 3 274.● Never change more than one

wheel at once.● Use the jack only to change

wheels in case of puncture, notfor seasonal winter or summertyre change.

● The jack is maintenance-free.● If the ground on which the vehicle

is standing is soft, a solid board(max. 1 cm thick) should beplaced under the jack.

● Take heavy objects out of thevehicle before jacking up.

272 Vehicle care

● No people or animals may be inthe vehicle when it is jacked-up.

● Never crawl under a jacked-upvehicle.

● Do not start the vehicle when it israised on the jack.

● Clean wheel nuts and thread witha clean cloth before mounting thewheel.

9 Warning

Do not grease wheel bolt, wheelnut and wheel nut cone.

1. Disengage wheel nut caps with ascrewdriver and remove.Steel wheels with cover: Pull offthe wheel cover.Alloy wheels: Disengage wheelnut caps with a screwdriver andremove. To protect the wheel,place a soft cloth between thescrewdriver and the alloy wheel.

2. Fold out the wheel wrench andinstall ensuring that it locatessecurely and loosen each wheelnut by half a turn.The wheels might be protected bylocking wheel nuts. To loosenthese specific nuts, first attach theadapter for the locking wheel nutsonto the head of the nut beforeinstalling the wheel wrench. Theadapter is located in the glovebox.

3. Ensure the jack is correctlypositioned under the relevantvehicle jacking point.

Some versions have sillpanellings with covered vehicle

Vehicle care 273

jacking points: pull out the coverat the respective jacking pointfirstly.

4. Set the jack to the necessaryheight. Position it directly belowthe jacking point in a manner thatprevents it from slipping.

Attach wheel wrench and with thejack correctly aligned rotate wheelwrench until wheel is clear of theground.

5. Unscrew the wheel nuts.6. Change the wheel. Spare wheel

3 274.7. Screw on the wheel nuts.8. Lower vehicle.9. Install the wheel wrench ensuring

that it is located securely andtighten each nut in a crosswisesequence. Tightening torque is125 Nm.

10. Align the valve hole in the wheelcover with the tyre valve beforeinstalling.Install wheel nut caps.

11. Install vehicle jacking point cover.12. Stow and secure the replaced

wheel 3 274, the vehicle tools3 260 and the adapter for thelocking wheel nuts 3 71.

13. Check the tyre pressure of theinstalled tyre and the wheel nuttorque as soon as possible.

Have the defective tyre renewed orrepaired as soon as possible.

Jacking position for lifting platform

274 Vehicle care

Rear arm position of the liftingplatform centrically under the relevantvehicle jacking point.

Front arm position of the liftingplatform centrically under the relevantvehicle jacking point.

Spare wheelSome vehicles are equipped with atyre repair kit instead of a sparewheel.If mounting a spare wheel, which isdifferent from the other wheels, thiswheel might be classified as atemporary spare wheel and thecorresponding speed limits apply,

even though no label indicates this.Seek the assistance of a workshop tocheck the applicable speed limit.The spare wheel has a steel rim.

Caution

The use of a spare wheel that issmaller than the other wheels or incombination with winter tyrescould affect driveability. Have thedefective tyre replaced as soon aspossible.

The spare wheel is located in the loadcompartment beneath the floorcovering.

To remove:1. Open the floor cover.2. The spare wheel is secured with a

wing nut. Turn wing nutanticlockwise and remove thespare wheel.Under the spare wheel there is thebox with vehicle tools.

3. When, after a wheel change, nowheel is placed in the spare wheelwell, secure the tool box byturning right back the wing nut andclose the floor cover.

4. After wheel change back to fullsize wheel, place the spare wheeloutside up in the well and securewith the wing nut.

Stowing the replaced full sizewheel in the spare wheel wellSecure a damaged full size wheelfacing upwards with the wing nut inthe spare wheel well after mountingan extension bolt on the thread bolt.The extension bolt is stowed with thevehicle tools 3 260. To secure thewheel:

Vehicle care 275

1. Stick the extension bolt onto thethread bolt.

2. Store the damaged wheel outsideup in the spare wheel well andsecure it by turning the wing nutclockwise on the extension bolt.

9 Warning

Storing a jack, a wheel or otherequipment in the loadcompartment could cause injury ifthey are not fixed properly. Duringa sudden stop or a collision, looseequipment could strike someone.

Store wheel, jack and tools alwaysin the original storage location andsecure them by fixing.

Temporary spare wheel

Caution

The use of a spare wheel that issmaller than the other wheels or incombination with winter tyrescould affect driveability. Have thedefective tyre replaced as soon aspossible.

Only mount one temporary sparewheel. Do not drive faster than50 mph. Take curves slowly. Do notuse for a long period of time.If your vehicle gets a flat tyre on therear while towing another vehicle,mount the temporary spare wheel inthe front and the full tyre in the rear.Tyre chains 3 266.

Spare wheel with directional tyreFit directional tyres such that they rollin the direction of travel. The rollingdirection is indicated by a symbol(e.g. an arrow) on the sidewall.The following applies to tyres fittedopposing the rolling direction:● Driveability may be affected.

Have the defective tyre renewedor repaired as soon as possibleand fit it instead of the sparewheel.

● Drive particularly carefully on wetand snow-covered roadsurfaces.

276 Vehicle care

Jump startingDo not start with quick charger.A vehicle with a discharged vehiclebattery can be started using jumpleads and the vehicle battery ofanother vehicle.

9 Warning

Be extremely careful when startingwith jump leads. Any deviationfrom the following instructions canlead to injuries or damage causedby battery explosion or damage tothe electrical systems of bothvehicles.

9 Warning

Avoid contact of the battery witheyes, skin, fabrics and paintedsurfaces. The fluid containssulphuric acid which can causeinjuries and damage in the eventof direct contact.

● Never expose the vehicle batteryto naked flames or sparks.

● A discharged vehicle battery canalready freeze at a temperatureof 0 °C. Defrost the frozen batterybefore connecting jump leads.

● Wear eye protection andprotective clothing whenhandling a battery.

● Use a booster battery with thesame voltage (12 Volts). Itscapacity (Ah) must not be muchless than that of the dischargedvehicle battery.

● Use jump leads with insulatedterminals and a cross section ofat least 16 mm2 (25 mm2 fordiesel engines).

● Do not disconnect the dischargedvehicle battery from the vehicle.

● Switch off all unnecessaryelectrical consumers.

● Do not lean over the vehiclebattery during jump starting.

● Do not allow the terminals of onelead to touch those of the otherlead.

● The vehicles must not come intocontact with each other duringthe jump starting process.

● Apply the parking brake,transmission in neutral,automatic transmission in P.

Open the positive terminal protectioncaps of both vehicle batteries.Lead connection order:1. Connect the red lead to the

positive terminal of the boosterbattery.

2. Connect the other end of the redlead to the positive terminal of thedischarged battery.

Vehicle care 277

3. Connect the black lead to thenegative terminal of the boosterbattery.

4. Connect the other end of the blacklead to a vehicle grounding pointof your vehicle in the enginecompartment.

Route the leads so that they cannotcatch on rotating parts in the enginecompartment.To start the engine:1. Start the engine of the vehicle

providing the jump.2. After five minutes, start the other

engine. Start attempts should bemade for no longer than15 seconds at an interval of oneminute.

3. Allow both engines to idle forapprox. three minutes with theleads connected.

4. Switch on electrical consumers(e.g. headlights, heated rearwindow) of the vehicle receivingthe jump start.

5. Reverse above sequence exactlywhen removing leads.

TowingTowing the vehicle

Disengage cap at slot and removedownwards.The towing eye is stowed with thevehicle tools 3 260.

Screw in the towing eye as far as it willgo until it stops in a horizontalposition.Attach a tow rope – or better still a towrod – to the towing eye.The towing eye must only be used fortowing and not for recovering thevehicle.Switch on ignition to release steeringwheel lock and to permit operation ofbrake lights, horn and windscreenwiper.Switch the selector lever to neutral.Release the parking brake.

278 Vehicle care

Caution

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily.Excessive tractive force candamage the vehicle.

When the engine is not running,considerably more force is needed tobrake and steer.To prevent the entry of exhaust gasesfrom the towing vehicle, switch on theair recirculation and close thewindows.Vehicles with manual transmissionand All-wheel drive: If the vehicle istowed with all four wheels on theground then there are no technicallimitations for speed and distance. Ifonly one axle has been raised, themaximum speed is 30 mph. There isno distance limitation.Vehicles with automatic transmissionand All-wheel drive: The vehicle mustbe towed facing forwards. If thevehicle is towed with all four wheelson the ground, the maximum speed is30 mph and for a maximum of30 miles. If the front axle has been

raised, the maximum speed is30 mph. There is no distancelimitation.Seek the assistance of a workshop.After towing, unscrew the towing eye.Iinsert cap with the outer flange intothe recess and fix cap by pushing.

Towing another vehicle

Disengage cap at bottom and removedownwards.The towing eye is stowed with thevehicle tools 3 260.

Screw in the towing eye as far as it willgo until it stops in a horizontalposition.The lashing eye at the rearunderneath the vehicle must never beused as a towing eye.Attach a tow rope – or better still a towrod – to the towing eye.The towing eye must only be used fortowing and not for recovering avehicle.

Vehicle care 279

Caution

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily.Excessive tractive force candamage the vehicle.

After towing, unscrew the towing eye.Insert cap with the upper flange intothe recess and fix cap by pushing.

Appearance careExterior careLocksThe locks are lubricated at the factoryusing a high quality lock cylindergrease. Use a de-icing agent onlywhen absolutely necessary, as thishas a degreasing effect and impairslock function. After using a de-icingagent, have the locks regreased by aworkshop.

WashingThe paintwork of your vehicle isexposed to environmental influences.Wash and wax your vehicle regularly.When using automatic vehiclewashes, select a programme thatincludes waxing.Bird droppings, dead insects, resin,pollen and the like should be cleanedoff immediately, as they containaggressive constituents which cancause paint damage.

If using a vehicle wash, comply withthe vehicle wash manufacturer'sinstructions. The windscreen wiperand rear window wiper must beswitched off. Remove antenna andexternal accessories such as roofracks etc.If you wash your vehicle by hand,make sure that the insides of thewheel housings are also thoroughlyrinsed out.Wax painted parts of the vehicleregularly.Clean edges and folds on openeddoors and the bonnet as well as theareas they cover.Clean bright metal mouldings with acleaning solution approved foraluminium to avoid damages.

Caution

Always use a cleaning agent witha pH value of four to nine.Do not use cleaning agents on hotsurfaces.

280 Vehicle care

Do not clean the engine compartmentwith a steam-jet or high-pressure jetcleaner.Thoroughly rinse and leather-off thevehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Useseparate leathers for painted andglass surfaces: remnants of wax onthe windows will impair vision.Have the door hinges of all doorsgreased by a workshop.

Exterior lightsHeadlight and other light covers aremade of plastic. Do not use anyabrasive or caustic agents, do not usean ice scraper, and do not clean themdry.

Polishing and waxingWax the vehicle regularly (at thelatest when water no longer beads).Otherwise, the paintwork will dry out.Polishing is necessary only if the painthas become dull or if solid depositshave become attached to it.Paintwork polish with silicone forms aprotective film, making waxingunnecessary.

Plastic body parts must not be treatedwith wax or polishing agents.

Windows and windscreen wiperbladesUse a soft lint-free cloth or chamoisleather together with window cleanerand insect remover.When cleaning the rear window frominside, always wipe in parallel to theheating element to prevent damage.For mechanical removal of ice, use asharp-edged ice scraper. Press thescraper firmly against the glass sothat no dirt can get under it andscratch the glass.Clean smearing wiper blades with asoft cloth and window cleaner.Remove dirt residues from smearingwiper blades by using a soft cloth andwindow cleaner. Also make sure toremove any residues such as wax,insect residues and similar from thewindow.Ice residues, pollution and continuouswiping on dry windows will damage oreven destroy the wiper blades.

SunroofNever clean with solvents or abrasiveagents, fuels, aggressive media(e.g. paint cleaner, acetone-containing solutions etc.), acidic orhighly alkaline media or abrasivepads. Do not apply wax or polishingagents to the sunroof.

Wheels and tyresDo not use high-pressure jetcleaners.Clean rims with a pH-neutral wheelcleaner.Rims are painted and can be treatedwith the same agents as the body.

Paintwork damageRectify minor paintwork damage witha touch-up pen before rust forms.Have more extensive damage or rustareas repaired by a workshop.

UnderbodySome areas of the vehicle underbodyhave a PVC undercoating while othercritical areas have a durableprotective wax coating.

Vehicle care 281

After the underbody is washed, checkthe underbody and have it waxed ifnecessary.Bitumen/rubber materials coulddamage the PVC coating. Haveunderbody work carried out by aworkshop.Before and after winter, wash theunderbody and have the protectivewax coating checked.

Liquid gas system

9 Danger

Liquid gas is heavier than air andcan collect in sink points.Take care when performing workat the underbody in a pit.

For painting work and when using adrying booth at a temperature above60 °C, the liquid gas tank must beremoved.Do not make any modifications to theliquid gas system.

Towing equipmentDo not clean the coupling ball bar witha steam-jet or high-pressure jetcleaner.

Interior careInterior and upholsteryOnly clean the vehicle interior,including the instrument panel fasciaand panelling, with a dry cloth orinterior cleaner.Clean the leather upholstery withclear water and a soft cloth. In case ofheavy soiling, use leather care.The instrument cluster and thedisplays should only be cleaned usinga soft damp cloth. If necessary use aweak soap solution.Clean fabric upholstery with avacuum cleaner and brush. Removestains with an upholstery cleaner.Clothing fabrics may not becolourfast. This could cause visiblediscolourations, especially on light-

coloured upholstery. Removablestains and discolourations should becleaned as soon as possible.Clean seat belts with lukewarm wateror interior cleaner.

Caution

Close Velcro fasteners as openVelcro fasteners on clothing coulddamage seat upholstery.The same applies to clothing withsharp-edged objects, like zips orbelts or studded jeans.

Plastic and rubber partsPlastic and rubber parts can becleaned with the same cleaner asused to clean the body. Use interiorcleaner if necessary. Do not use anyother agent. Avoid solvents and petrolin particular. Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.

282 Service and maintenance

Service andmaintenance

General information ................... 282Service information .................. 282

Recommended fluids, lubricantsand parts .................................... 283

Recommended fluids andlubricants ................................ 283

General informationService informationIn order to ensure economical andsafe vehicle operation and tomaintain the value of your vehicle, itis of vital importance that allmaintenance work is carried out at theproper intervals as specified.The detailed, up-to-date serviceschedule for your vehicle is availableat the workshop.Service display 3 104.

European service intervalsMaintenance of your vehicle isrequired every 20,000 miles or after1 year, whichever occurs first, unlessotherwise indicated in the servicedisplay.A shorter service interval can be validfor severe driving behaviour, e.g. fortaxis and police vehicles.The European service intervals arevalid for the following countries:

Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bosnia-Herzegovina, Bulgaria, Croatia,Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark,Estonia, Finland, France, Germany,Greece, Greenland, Hungary,Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia,Liechtenstein, Lithuania,Luxembourg, Macedonia, Malta,Monaco, Montenegro, Netherlands,Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania,San Marino, Serbia, Slovakia,Slovenia, Spain, Sweden,Switzerland, United Kingdom.Service display 3 104.

International service intervalsMaintenance of your vehicle isrequired every 10,000 miles or after1 year, whichever occurs first, unlessotherwise indicated in the servicedisplay.Severe operating conditions exist ifone or more of the followingcircumstances occur frequently: Coldstarting, stop and go operation, traileroperation, mountain driving, drivingon poor and sandy road surfaces,increased air pollution, presence ofairborne sand and high dust content,

Service and maintenance 283

driving at high altitude and largevariations of temperature. Underthese severe operating conditions,certain service work may be requiredmore frequently than the regularservice interval.The international service intervals arevalid for the countries which are notlisted in the European serviceintervals.Service display 3 104.

ConfirmationsConfirmation of service is recorded inthe Service and Warranty Booklet.The date and mileage is completedwith the stamp and signature of theservicing workshop.Make sure that the Service andWarranty Booklet is completedcorrectly as continuous proof ofservice is essential if any warranty orgoodwill claims are to be met, and isalso a benefit when selling thevehicle.

Service interval with remainingengine oil life durationThe service interval is based onseveral parameters depending onusage.The service display lets you knowwhen to change the engine oil.Service display 3 104.

Recommended fluids,lubricants and partsRecommended fluids andlubricantsOnly use products that meet therecommended specifications.

9 Warning

Operating materials arehazardous and could bepoisonous. Handle with care. Payattention to information given onthe containers.

Engine oilEngine oil is identified by its qualityand its viscosity. Quality is moreimportant than viscosity whenselecting which engine oil to use. Theoil quality ensures e.g. enginecleanliness, wear protection and oilaging control, whereas viscositygrade gives information on the oil'sthickness over a temperature range.

284 Service and maintenance

Dexos is the newest engine oil qualitythat provides optimum protection forpetrol and diesel engines. If it isunavailable, engine oils of other listedqualities must be used.Recommendations for petrol enginesare also valid for Compressed NaturalGas (CNG), Liquified Petroleum Gas(LPG) and Ethanol (E85) fuelledengines.Select the appropriate engine oilbased on its quality and on theminimum ambient temperature3 288.

Topping up engine oil

Caution

In case of any spilled oil, wipe it upand dispose it properly.

Engine oils of different manufacturersand brands can be mixed as long asthey comply with the required engineoil quality and viscosity.

Use of engine oils for all petrolengines with only ACEA quality isprohibited, since it can cause enginedamage under certain operatingconditions.Select the appropriate engine oilbased on its quality and on theminimum ambient temperature3 288.

Additional engine oil additivesThe use of additional engine oiladditives could cause damage andinvalidate the warranty.

Engine oil viscosity gradesThe SAE viscosity grade givesinformation on the thickness of the oil.Multigrade oil is indicated by twofigures, e.g. SAE 5W-30. The firstfigure, followed by a W, indicates thelow temperature viscosity and thesecond figure the high temperatureviscosity.Select the appropriate viscosity gradedepending on the minimum ambienttemperature 3 288.

All of the recommended viscositygrades are suitable for high ambienttemperatures.

Coolant and antifreezeUse only organic acid type-long lifecoolant (LLC) antifreeze approved forthe vehicle. Consult a workshop.The system is factory filled withcoolant designed for excellentcorrosion protection and frostprotection down to approx. -28 °C. Incold regions with very lowtemperatures the factory filled coolantprovides frost protection down toapprox. -37 °C. This concentrationshould be maintained all year round.The use of additional coolantadditives that intend to give additionalcorrosion protection or seal againstminor leaks can cause functionproblems. Liability for consequencesresulting from the use of additionalcoolant additives will be rejected.

Service and maintenance 285

Washer fluidUse only washer fluid approved forthe vehicle to prevent damage ofwiper blades, paintwork, plastic andrubber parts. Consult a workshop.

Brake and clutch fluidOver time, brake fluid absorbsmoisture which will reduce brakingeffectiveness. The brake fluid shouldtherefore be replaced at the specifiedinterval.

AdBlueOnly use AdBlue to reduce thenitrogen oxides in the exhaustemission 3 170.

286 Technical data

Technical data

Vehicle identification .................. 286Vehicle Identification Number .. 286Identification plate ................... 286Engine identification ................ 287

Vehicle data ............................... 288Recommended fluids andlubricants ................................ 288

Engine data ............................. 291Performance ............................ 293Vehicle weight ......................... 295Vehicle dimensions ................. 298Capacities ................................ 299Tyre pressures ........................ 300Towing hitch installationdimensions ............................. 304

Vehicle identificationVehicle IdentificationNumber

The Vehicle Identification Number isvisible through the windscreen.The Vehicle Identification Numbermay be stamped on the identificationplate and on the floor pan, under thefloor covering, visible under a cover,or in the engine compartment on theright body panel.

Identification plate

The identification label is located onthe front left or right door frame.

Technical data 287

Information on identification plate:1 : manufacturer2 : type approval number3 : vehicle identification number4 : permissible gross vehicle weight

rating in kg5 : permissible gross train weight in

kg6 : maximum permissible front axle

load in kg7 : maximum permissible rear axle

load in kg8 : vehicle-specific or country-

specific data, e.g. MY = modelyear

The combined total of front and rearaxle loads must not exceed thepermissible gross vehicle weight. Forexample, if the front axle is bearing itsmaximum permissible load, the rearaxle can only bear a load that is equalto the gross vehicle weight minus thefront axle load.The technical data is determined inaccordance with EuropeanCommunity standards. We reservethe right to make modifications.

Specifications in the vehicledocuments always have priority overthose given in this manual.

Engine identificationThe technical data tables use theengine identifier code. The enginedata table additionally shows theengineering code. Engine data3 291.To identify the respective engine,refer to the EEC Certificate ofConformity provided with your vehicleor other national registrationdocuments.The Certificate of Conformity showsthe engine identifier code, othernational publications may show theengineering code. Check pistondisplacement and engine power toidentify the respective engine.

288 Technical data

Vehicle dataRecommended fluids and lubricantsEuropean service schedule

Required engine oil qualityAll countries with European service interval 3 282

Engine oil quality Petrol engines(including CNG, LPG, E85)

Diesel engines

dexos1 Gen2 ✔ –

dexos2 – ✔

Diesel engines only: In case dexos quality is unavailable, you may use max. one litre engine oil quality ACEA C3 oncebetween each oil change.

Engine oil viscosity gradesAll countries with European service interval 3 282

Ambient temperature Petrol and diesel engines

down to -25 °C SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40

SAE 5W-30 or SAE 5W-40

below -25 °C SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40

Technical data 289

International service schedule

Required engine oil qualityAll countries with international service interval 3 282


Diesel engines

dexos1 Gen2 ✔ –

dexos2 – ✔

In case dexos quality is unavailable you may use the oil qualities listed below:

All countries with international service interval 3 282


Diesel engines

ACEA A3/B4 – ✔

ACEA C3 – ✔

Engine oil viscosity gradesAll countries with international service interval 3 282

Ambient temperature Petrol and diesel engines

down to -25 °C SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40

SAE 5W-30 or SAE 5W-40

290 Technical data

All countries with international service interval 3 282

below -25 °C SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40

down to -20 °C SAE 10W-301) or SAE 10W-401)

1) Permitted, but usage of oils with dexos quality is recommended.

Technical data 291

Engine dataEngine identifier code B15XHL B15XHT B20NFTSales designation 1.5T 1.5T 2.0TEngineering code B15XHT B15XHT B20NFT

Piston displacement [cm3] 1490 1490 1998

Engine power [kW] 103 121 191

at rpm 5600 5600 5500

Torque [Nm] 250 250 400

at rpm 2000-4100 2000-4500 3000-4000

Fuel type Petrol Petrol Petrol

Octane rating RON2)

recommended 95 95 95

possible 98 98 98

possible 91 91 91

Additional fuel type – – –

2) A country-specific label at the fuel filler flap can supersede the engine-specific requirement.

292 Technical data

Engine identifier code B16DTE B16DTH B20DTH B20DTRSales designation 1.6 1.6 2.0 2.0Engineering code B16DTE B16DTH B20DTH B20DTR

Piston displacement [cm3] 1598 1598 1956 1956

Engine power [kW] 81 100 125 3)

at rpm 3500 3500-4000 3750 3)

Torque [Nm] 300 320 400 3)

at rpm 1750-2000 2000-2250 1750-2500 3)

Fuel type Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel

3) Not available at time of printing

Technical data 293

PerformanceGrand Sport

Engine B15XHL B15XHT B20NFT

Maximum speed [mph]

Manual transmission 130/1324) 138/1404) –

Automatic transmission – 135 155

4) ECO

EngineB16DTE B16DTH B20DTH

B20DTHAWD5)

B20DTRAWD5)

Maximum speed [mph]

Manual transmission 125/1274) 131 140 139 –

Automatic transmission – 124 139 – 6)

4) ECO5) All wheel drive6) Not available at time of printing

294 Technical data



Maximum speed [mph]

Manual transmission 130/1324) 138/1404) –

Automatic transmission – 135 155

4) ECO

EngineB16DTH B20DTH

B20DTHAWD5)

B20DTRAWD 5)

Maximum speed [mph]

Manual transmission 6) 139 139 –

Automatic transmission 6) 137 137 6)

5) All wheel drive6) Not available at time of printing

Technical data 295

Vehicle weightKerb weight, basic model without any optional equipment

Grand Sport Engine Manual transmission Automatic transmission

[kg] B15XHL 1440/14567) –

B15XHT 1441/14727) 1472

B20NFT – 1649

[kg] B16DTE 1503 –

B16DTH 1503 1522

B20DTH 1582 –

B20DTHAWD8)

1683 –

7) ECO8) All wheel drive

Optional equipment and accessories increase the kerb weight.Loading information 3 84.

296 Technical data

Kerb weight, basic model without any optional equipment

Sports Tourer Engine Manual transmission Automatic transmission

[kg] B15XHL 1487 –

B15XHT 1487/15037) 1522

B20NFT – 1683

[kg] B16DTE 1522 –

B16DTH 1537 1567

B20DTH 1633/17168) 1666

B20DTR – 1772

7) ECO8) All wheel drive


Kerb weight, basic model without any optional equipment

Country Tourer Engine Manual transmission Automatic transmission

[kg] B15XHL 1522 –

B15XHT 1522 1552

B20NFT – 1699

Technical data 297

Country Tourer Engine Manual transmission Automatic transmission

[kg] B16DTH 9) 9)

B20DTH 1666/17168) 1666

B20DTR – 1807

8) All wheel drive9) Not available at time of printing


298 Technical data

Vehicle dimensionsGrand Sport Sports Tourer, Country Tourer

Length min.-max. [mm] 4897 4986-500410)

Width with folded exterior mirrors [mm] 1941 1941

Width with unfolded exterior mirrors [mm] 2093 2093

Height (without antenna) [mm] 1455 155011)

Vehicle height - Rear compartment open [mm] 2123 2065

Length of load compartment floor [mm] 1133 1178

Length of load compartment with folded rear seats [mm] 1940 2005

Load compartment width [mm] 1030 1030

Load compartment height [mm] 497 384

Wheelbase [mm] 2829 2829

Turning circle diameter [m] 11.75 11.75

10) Minimum length for standard version, maximum length for Country Tourer version.11) Depending on body- and equipment variants.

Technical data 299

CapacitiesEngine oil


including Filter [l] 4.0 4.0 5.7

between MIN and MAX [l] 1.0 1.0 1.0

Engine B16DTE B16DTH B20DTH

including Filter [l] 5.0 5.0 5.25

between MIN and MAX [l] 1.0 1.0 1.0

Fuel tank

Petrol/diesel, refilling quantity [l] 61

AdBlue tank

AdBlue, refilling quantity [l] 15

300 Technical data

Tyre pressuresTyre pressures differ depending onthe model variant. The order of thelisted car models is as follows:

● Vehicles with Front-wheel drive● Vehicles with All-wheel drive

Refer to the table header to find thecorrect tyre pressure for your model.

Technical data 301

Tyre pressures for vehicles with Front-wheel drive

Grand Sport, Sports Tourer, Country TourerComfort with up to 3 people ECO with up to 3 people With full load

Engine Tyres front rear front rear front rear[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

B15XHL,B15XHT,B16DTE,B16DTH

215/60 R16,225/55 R17,215/55 R17,235/45 R18,235/50 R18 12),245/45 R18

220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 240/2.4(35)

270/2.7(39)

B20DTH 225/55 R17,235/50 R1812),245/45 R18

220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 260/2.6(38)

290/2.9(42)

235/45 R18,245/35 R20

230/2.3 (33) 230/2.3 (33) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 260/2.6(38)

290/2.9(42)

All Temporary spare wheel125/80 R16,125/70 R17

420/4.2 (60) 420/4.2 (60) – – 420/4.2(60)

420/4.2(60)

12) Country Tourer only

302 Technical data

Tyre pressures for vehicles with All-wheel drive

Grand Sport, Sports Tourer, Country TourerComfort with up to 3 people ECO with up to 3 people With full load

Engine Tyres front rear front rear front rear[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

B20NFT 235/45 R18 250/2.5 (36) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 260/2.6 (38) 290/2.9 (42)

245/45 R18,235/50 R1812)

245/35 ZR20

230/2.3 (33) 230/2.3 (33) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 260/2.6 (38) 290/2.9 (42)

B20DTH 225/55 R17,245/45 R18,235/50 R1812)

220/2.2 (32) 220/2.2 (32) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 260/2.6 (38) 290/2.9 (42)

235/45 R18,245/35 R20

230/2.3 (33) 230/2.3 (33) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 260/2.6 (38) 290/2.9 (42)

Technical data 303

Comfort with up to 3 people ECO with up to 3 people With full loadEngine Tyres front rear front rear front rear

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

[kPa/bar]([psi])

B20DTR 225/55 R17,245/45 R18,235/50 R1812)

230/2.3 (33) 230/2.3 (33) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 260/2.6 (38) 290/2.9 (42)

235/45 R18 250/2.5 (36) 250/2.5 (36) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 260/2.6 (38) 290/2.9 (42)

245/35 R20 240/2.4 (35) 240/2.4 (35) 270/2.7 (39) 270/2.7 (39) 260/2.6 (38) 290/2.9 (42)

All Temporary spare wheel125/80 R16,125/70 R17

420/4.2 (60) 420/4.2 (60) – – 420/4.2 (60) 420/4.2 (60)

12) Country Tourer only

304 Technical data

Towing hitch installation dimensionsGrandsport

Technical data 305


306 Customer information

Customerinformation

Customer information ................ 306Declaration of conformity ......... 306REACH .................................... 310Collision damage repair ........... 310Software acknowledgement .... 311Software update ...................... 312Registered trademarks ............ 313

Vehicle data recording and pri‐vacy ........................................... 313

Event data recorders ............... 313Radio Frequency Identification(RFID) ..................................... 314

Customer informationDeclaration of conformityRadio transmission systemsThis vehicle has systems thattransmit and/or receive radio wavessubject to Directive 1999/5/EC or2014/53/EU. These systems are incompliance with the essentialrequirements and other relevantprovisions of Directive 1999/5/EC or2014/53/EU. The full text of the EUdeclaration of conformity for eachsystem is available at the followinginternet address: www.opel.com/conformityImporter isOpel / Vauxhall, Bahnhofsplatz,65423 Ruesselsheim am Main,Germany.

AntennaLairdDaimlerring 31, 31135 Hildesheim,GermanyOperation frequency: N/AMaximum output: N/A

AntennaKathrein Automotive GmbHRoemerring 1, 31137 Hildesheim,GermanyOperation frequency: N/AMaximum output: N/A

Electronic key receiverDenso CorporationWaldeckerstaße 11, 64546Mörfelden-Walldorf, GermanyOperation frequency: 125 kHzMaximum output: -0.14 dBm

Electronic key transmitterDenso Corporation1-1, Showa-cho, Kariya-shi, Aichi-ken 448-8661, JapanOperation frequency: 433.92 MHzMaximum output: -5.88 dBm

ImmobiliserRobert Bosch GmbHRobert Bosch Platz 1, 70839Gerlingen, GermanyOperation frequency: 125 kHz

Customer information 307

Maximum output:5.1 dBµA/m @ 10 m

Infotainment system R 4.0 IntelliLinkLGELG Electronics European SharedService Center B.V., Krijgsman 1,1186 DM Amstelveen, TheNetherlands

Operationfrequency (MHz)

Maximum output(dBm)

2400.0 - 2483.5 4

2400.0 - 2483.5 13

5725.0 - 5850.0 13

Infotainment system Navi 900IntelliLinkRobert Bosch Car Multimedia GmbHRobert-Bosch-Straße 200, 31139Hildesheim, Germany


Maximum output(dBm)

2400.0 - 2480.0 10

2400.0 - 2480.0 20

Delphi Deutschland GmbH42367 Wuppertal, GermanyOperation frequency: N/AMaximum output: N/A

OnStar moduleLGELG Electronics European SharedService Center B.V., Krijgsman 1,1186 DM Amstelveen, TheNetherlands


Maximum output(dBm)

2402 - 2480 4

2412 - 2462 18

880 - 915 33

1710 - 1785 24

1850 - 1910 24

1920 - 1980 24

2500 - 2570 23

Parking heater remote controlreceiverWebasto Thermo & Comfort SE

Friedrichshafener Str. 9, 82205Gilching, GermanyOperation frequency: N/AMaximum output: N/A

Parking heater remote controltransmitterWebasto Thermo & Comfort SEFriedrichshafener Str. 9, 82205Gilching, GermanyOperation frequency: 869.0 MHzMaximum output: 14 dBm

Radar unitContinental Automotive GmbHADC Automotive Distance ControlSystems GmbH, Peter-Dornier-Strasse 10, 88131 Lindau, GermanyOperation frequency: 76-77 GhzMaximum output: 35 EIRP dBm

Radar unitHella KGaA Hueck & Co.Rixbecker Straße 75, 59552LippstadtOperation frequency:24.05-24.25 Ghz


Maximum output: 20 EIRP dBm

Radio remote control transmitterRobert Bosch GmbHRobert Bosch Platz 1, 70839Gerlingen, GermanyOperation frequency: 433.92 MHzMaximum output: -4 dBm

Radio remote control receiverRobert Bosch GmbHRobert Bosch Platz 1, 70839Gerlingen, GermanyOperation frequency: N/AMaximum output: N/A

Tyre pressure sensorsSchrader Electronics Ltd.11 Technology Park, Belfast Road,Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland,United KingdomOperation frequency: 433.92 MHzMaximum output: 10 dBm


Jack


Translation of the original declarationof conformityDeclaration of conformity accordingto EC Directive 2006/42/ECWe declare that the product:Product designation: Scissor / screwautomotive jackType/GM part number: 13592351scissor jackis in compliance with the provisions ofDirective 2006/42/EC.Applied technical standards:GMW 14337 : standard equipment

jack – hardware testsGMW15005 : standard equipment

jack and spare tire,vehicle test

The person authorised to compile thetechnical documentation is Hans-Peter MetzgerEngineering Group Manager Chassis& StructureAdam Opel AGD-65423 Rüsselsheimsigned byCharu HayesEngineering Group Manager Tyre &Wheel SystemsWarren, Michigan, 48090GMNA, USA26th June 2016

REACHRegistration, Evaluation,Authorisation and Restriction ofChemicals (REACH) is a EuropeanUnion regulation adopted to improvethe protection of human health andthe environment from the risks thatcan be posed by chemicals. Visitwww.opel.com/reach for furtherinformation and for access to theArticle 33 communication.

Collision damage repairOpel Exclusive paintThickness of Opel Exclusive paintsmay be higher than stock.

A sticker with information about theindividual Opel Exclusive paintformula is placed in the spare wheelwell.


Software acknowledgementCertain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associated withlibcurl and unzip and for other thirdparty software please see http://www.lg.com/global/support/opensource/index.

libcurlCopyright and permission noticeCopyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.All rights reserved.Permission to use, copy, modify, anddistribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee is herebygranted, provided that the abovecopyright notice and this permissionnotice appear in all copies.The software is provided "as is",without warranty of any kind, expressor implied, including but not limited tothe warranties of merchantability,fitness for a particular purpose andnoninfringement of third party rights.In no event shall the authors or

copyright holders be liable for anyclaim, damages or other liability,whether in an action of contract, tortor otherwise, arising from, out of or inconnection with the software or theuse or other dealings in the software.Except as contained in this notice, thename of a copyright holder shall notbe used in advertising or otherwise topromote the sale, use or otherdealings in this Software without priorwritten authorization of the copyrightholder.

unzipThis is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.htmlindefinitely.Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.For the purposes of this copyright andlicense, “Info-ZIP” is defined as thefollowing set of individuals:Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed

Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth,Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, RobertHeath, Jonathan Hudson, PaulKienitz, David Kirschbaum, JohnnyLee, Onno van der Linden, IgorMandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, SergioMonesi, Keith Owens, GeorgePetrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai UweRommel, Steve Salisbury, DaveSmith, Steven M. Schweda, ChristianSpieler, Cosmin Truta, AntoineVerheijen, Paul von Behren, RichWales, Mike White.This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind, expressor implied. In no event shall Info-ZIPor its contributors be held liable forany direct, indirect, incidental, specialor consequential damages arising outof the use of or inability to use thissoftware.Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute it freely,subject to the following restrictions:


1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exception tothis condition is redistribution of astandard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion of thislicense, as long as the normalSFX banner has not beenremoved from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions--including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces, anddynamic, shared, or static libraryversions--must be plainly markedas such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such altered

versions also must not bemisrepresented as being Info-ZIPreleases--including, but notlimited to, labeling of the alteredversions with the names “Info-ZIP” (or any variation thereof,including, but not limited to,different capitalizations), “PocketUnZip,” “WiZ” or “MacZip” withoutthe explicit permission of Info-ZIP.Such altered versions are furtherprohibited from misrepresentativeuse of the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail addresses or of the Info-ZIPURL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,” and“MacZip” for its own source andbinary releases.

Software updateThe Infotainment system candownload and install selectedsoftware updates over a wirelessconnection.

NoticeThe availability of these over-the-airvehicle software updates varies byvehicle and country. Find moreinformation on our home page.

Internet connectionDownloading over-the-air vehiclesoftware updates requires internetconnectivity, which can be accessedthrough the vehicle's built-in OnStarconnection or another password-protected Wi-Fi hotspot, e.g. providedby a mobile phone.To connect the Infotainment systemto a hotspot, select Settings on thehome screen, Wi-Fi and then ManageWi-Fi Networks. Select the desiredWi-Fi network, and follow the on-screen prompts.

UpdatesThe system will prompt for certainupdates to be downloaded andinstalled. There is also an option tocheck for updates manually.


To manually check for updates, selectSettings on the home screen,Software Information and thenSystem Update. Follow the on-screenprompts.NoticeSteps for downloading and installingupdates may vary by vehicle.NoticeDuring the installation process, thevehicle may not be operational.

Registered trademarksApple Inc.Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark ofApple Inc.App Store® and iTunes Store® areregistered trademarks of Apple Inc.iPhone®, iPod®, iPod touch®, iPodnano®, iPad® and Siri® are registeredtrademarks of Apple Inc.Bluetooth SIG, Inc.Bluetooth® is a registered trademarkof Bluetooth SIG, Inc.DivX, LLCDivX® and DivX Certified® areregistered trademarks of DivX, LLC.

EnGIS Technologies, Inc.BringGo® is a registered trademark ofEnGIS Technologies, Inc.Google Inc.Android™ and Google Play™ Storeare trademarks of Google Inc.Stitcher Inc.Stitcher™ is a trademark of Stitcher,Inc.Verband der Automobilindustrie e.V.AdBlue® is a registered trademark ofthe VDA.

Vehicle data recordingand privacyEvent data recordersData storage modules in thevehicleA large number of electroniccomponents of your vehicle containdata storage modules temporarily orpermanently storing technical dataabout the condition of the vehicle,events and errors. In general, thistechnical information documents thecondition of parts, modules, systemsor the environment:● operating conditions of system

components (e.g. filling levels)● status messages of the vehicle

and its single components (e.g.number of wheel revolutions /rotational speed, deceleration,lateral acceleration)

● dysfunctions and defects inimportant system components


● vehicle reactions in particulardriving situations (e.g. inflation ofan airbag, activation of thestability regulation system)

● environmental conditions (e.g.temperature)

These data are exclusively technicaland help identifying and correctingerrors as well as optimising vehiclefunctions.Motion profiles indicating travelledroutes cannot be created with thesedata.If services are used (e.g. repairworks, service processes, warrantycases, quality assurance),employees of the service network(manufacturer included) are able toread out this technical informationfrom the event and error data storagemodules applying special diagnosticdevices. If required, you will receivefurther information at theseworkshops. After an error has beencorrected, the data are deleted fromthe error storage module or they areconstantly overwritten.

When using the vehicle, situationsmay occur in which these technicaldata related to other information(accident report, damages on thevehicle, witness statements etc.) maybe associated with a specific person -possibly, with the assistance of anexpert.Additional functions contractuallyagreed upon with the client (e.g.vehicle location in emergency cases)allow the transmission of particularvehicle data from the vehicle.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tyrepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security. It is also used inconnection with conveniences suchas radio remote controls andelectronic keys for door locking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicletransmitters for garage door openers.RFID technology in Vauxhall vehiclesdoes not use or record personalinformation or link with any otherVauxhall system containing personalinformation.

316

Index AAccessories and vehicle

modifications .......................... 237Active bonnet................................ 69Active emergency braking.......... 201Adaptive cruise control....... 111, 189AdBlue................................ 109, 170Adjustable air vents ................... 157Airbag and belt tensioners ......... 106Airbag deactivation .............. 61, 106Airbag label................................... 56Airbag system .............................. 56Air conditioning regular

operation ................................ 159Air conditioning system .............. 148Air intake .................................... 158Air vents...................................... 157All-wheel drive ........................... 178Antilock brake system ................ 178Antilock brake system (ABS) ..... 108Anti-theft alarm system ................ 32Anti-theft locking system .............. 32Appearance care........................ 279Armrest................................... 51, 53Armrest storage ........................... 72Ashtrays ....................................... 95Automatic anti-dazzle .................. 38Automatic dimming ...................... 37Automatic light control ............... 135Automatic locking ........................ 25

Automatic transmission ............. 173Autostop..................................... 165Auxiliary heater........................... 157

BBaselevel display........................ 112Battery discharge protection ...... 146Battery voltage ........................... 124Belts.............................................. 54BlueInjection............................... 170Bonnet ....................................... 239Brake and clutch fluid................. 283Brake and clutch system ........... 107Brake assist ............................... 180Brake fluid .................................. 242Brakes ............................... 178, 242Breakdown.................................. 277Bulb replacement ....................... 245

CCapacities .................................. 299Cargo management system ........ 79Catalytic converter ..................... 169Central locking system ................ 21Centre console lighting .............. 145Centre console storage ............... 72Changing tyre and wheel size . . . 266Charging system ........................ 107Child locks ................................... 26Child restraint installation

locations ................................... 65

317

Child restraints.............................. 62Child restraint systems ................ 62Climate control ............................. 15Clock............................................. 91Collision damage repair.............. 310Control indicators........................ 105Control of the vehicle ................. 161Controls........................................ 87Convex shape .............................. 35Coolant and antifreeze............... 283Cruise control .................... 111, 186Cupholders .................................. 71Curtain airbag system .................. 60Curve lighting.............................. 138

DDanger, Warnings and Cautions . . . 4Daytime running lights ............... 138Declaration of conformity............ 306DEF............................................ 170Diesel exhaust fluid.................... 170Diesel fuel system bleeding ....... 244Diesel particle filter .................... 168Door open .................................. 111Doors............................................ 27Driver assistance systems.......... 186Driver Information Centre........... 112Driving characteristics and

towing tips .............................. 234Driving hints................................ 161

EElectric adjustment ...................... 35Electrical system......................... 255Electric parking brake......... 107, 179Electric parking brake fault......... 107Electronic climate control system 151Electronic key system................... 19Electronic Stability Control.......... 182Electronic Stability Control and

Traction Control system.......... 108Electronic Stability Control off..... 108End-of-life vehicle recovery ....... 238Engine compartment fuse box ... 256Engine coolant ........................... 241Engine coolant temperature ...... 109Engine coolant temperature

gauge ..................................... 104Engine data ............................... 291Engine exhaust .......................... 168Engine identification................... 287Engine oil ................... 240, 283, 288Engine oil pressure .................... 109Entry lighting .............................. 145Event data recorders.................. 313Exit lighting ................................ 145Exterior care .............................. 279Exterior light ............................... 110Exterior lighting .................... 12, 134Exterior mirrors............................. 35

FFirst aid kit ................................... 82Fixed air vents ........................... 158Fog light ..................................... 110Fog lights ................................... 247Folding mirrors ............................. 36Following distance...................... 108Following distance indication...... 200Forward collision alert................. 197Front airbag system ..................... 59Front fog lights ........................... 142Front pedestrian protection........ 204Front seats.................................... 45Front storage................................ 72Fuel............................................. 230Fuel for diesel engines .............. 231Fuel for petrol engines ............... 230Fuel gauge ................................. 103Funnel......................................... 231Fuses ......................................... 255

GGauges....................................... 101Gear shifting............................... 108General information ................... 233Glovebox ..................................... 71

HHalogen headlights .................... 245Hand brake................................. 178Hazard warning flashers ............ 141

318

Headlight flash ........................... 137Headlight range adjustment ...... 137Headlights................................... 134Headlights when driving abroad 137Head restraint adjustment ............. 8Head restraints ............................ 43Head-up display.......................... 121Heated mirrors ............................. 37Heated rear window ..................... 40Heated steering wheel ................. 88Heated windscreen....................... 41Heating .................................. 52, 53High beam ......................... 110, 135High beam assist................ 110, 135Hill start assist ........................... 181Horn ....................................... 13, 88

IIdentification plate ..................... 286Immobiliser .......................... 35, 110Indicators.................................... 101Inductive charging........................ 94Info display................................. 119Information displays.................... 112Instrument cluster ........................ 96Instrument panel fuse box ......... 259Instrument panel illumination ..... 255Instrument panel illumination

control .................................... 143Instrument panel overview ........... 10

Interactive driving system........... 183Interior care ............................... 281Interior lighting............................ 143Interior lights ...................... 143, 255Interior mirrors.............................. 37Introduction .................................... 3

JJump starting ............................. 276

KKey, memorised settings.............. 21

LLane change alert....................... 216Lane keep assist................ 108, 228Lashing eyes ............................... 79LED headlights........... 110, 138, 247Lighting features......................... 145Light switch ................................ 134Load compartment ................ 27, 73Load compartment cover ............. 76Loading information ..................... 84Low fuel ..................................... 110

MMalfunction indicator light .......... 107Manual anti-dazzle ...................... 37Manual seat adjustment............... 46Manual transmission .................. 177Massage....................................... 53

Memorised settings...................... 21Midlevel display.......................... 112Mirror adjustment ........................... 8Misted light covers ..................... 143

NNew vehicle running-in .............. 161Number plate light ..................... 255

OObject detection systems........... 206Odometer ................................... 102Oil, engine.......................... 283, 288OnStar........................................ 129Outside temperature .................... 91Overrun cut-off ........................... 164

PPanoramic view system.............. 218Parking ................................ 18, 167Parking assist ...................... 37, 206Parking brake ............................ 179Parking lights ............................. 142Particulate filter........................... 168Pedestrian detection................... 111Performance .............................. 293Performing work ........................ 239Power button.............................. 162Power outlets ............................... 93Power seat adjustment ................ 48Power windows ............................ 38

319

Preheating ................................. 109Puncture..................................... 271

QQuickheat................................... 157

RRadio Frequency Identification

(RFID)..................................... 314REACH....................................... 310Reading lights ............................ 144Rear cross traffic alert................ 222Rear floor storage cover .............. 78Rear fog light ..................... 111, 142Rear seats.................................... 53Rear storage................................. 78Rear view camera ...................... 220Rear window wiper/washer .......... 90Recommended fluids and

lubricants ........................ 283, 288Refuelling ................................... 231Registered trademarks............... 313Retained power off..................... 163Reversing lights ......................... 143Ride control systems.................. 181Roof.............................................. 41Roof load...................................... 84Roof rack ..................................... 83

SSafety belts................................... 54Safety net .................................... 79Seat adjustment ............................. 6Seat belt ........................................ 8Seat belt reminder ..................... 105Seat belts ..................................... 54Seat heating

Seat heating, front..................... 52Seat heating, rear..................... 53

Seat position ................................ 45Selective catalytic reduction....... 170Service ............................... 159, 282Service display .......................... 104Service information .................... 282Side airbag system ...................... 60Side blind zone assistant............ 214Sidelights.................................... 134Side turn signal lights ................ 254Software acknowledgement....... 311Software update......................... 312Spare wheel ............................... 274Speed limiter....................... 111, 188Speedometer ............................. 101Starting and operating................ 161Starting off ................................... 17Starting the engine .................... 163Steering...................................... 161Steering wheel adjustment ...... 9, 87Steering wheel controls ............... 87

Stop-start system........................ 165Storage......................................... 71Storage compartments................. 71Sunglasses storage ..................... 72Sunroof ........................................ 41Sunvisor lights ........................... 145Sun visors .................................... 41Symbols ......................................... 4

TTachometer ............................... 103Tail lights ................................... 249Three-point seat belt .................... 55Tools .......................................... 260Tow bar....................................... 233Towing................................ 233, 277Towing another vehicle ............. 278Towing equipment ..................... 235Towing hitch installation

dimensions ............................. 304Towing the vehicle ..................... 277Traction Control system ............. 181Traction Control system off......... 109Traffic sign assistant........... 111, 223Trailer coupling........................... 233Trailer stability assist ................. 236Trailer towing ............................. 234Transmission ............................... 16Tread depth ............................... 265Trip odometer ............................ 102

320

Turn and lane-change signals ... 141Turn signal ................................. 105Tyre chains ................................ 266Tyre designations ...................... 262Tyre pressure ............................ 262Tyre pressure monitoring

system............................. 109, 263Tyre pressures ........................... 300Tyre repair kit ............................. 267

UUltrasonic parking assist............. 206Upholstery.................................. 281Uplevel display........................... 112Using this manual .......................... 3

VValet mode................................. 119Vehicle battery ........................... 243Vehicle checks............................ 239Vehicle data................................ 288Vehicle data recording and

privacy..................................... 313Vehicle detected ahead.............. 111Vehicle dimensions .................... 298Vehicle Identification Number .... 286Vehicle jack................................ 260Vehicle messages ..................... 123Vehicle personalisation ............. 125Vehicle security............................ 32Vehicle specific data ...................... 3

Vehicle storage........................... 238Vehicle tools............................... 260Vehicle unlocking ........................... 6Vehicle weight ........................... 295Ventilating..................................... 52

WWarning chimes ......................... 124Warning lights............................. 101Warning triangle .......................... 82Washer and wiper systems ......... 13Washer fluid ............................... 242Wheel changing ......................... 271Wheel covers ............................. 266Wheels and tyres ....................... 261Windows....................................... 38Windscreen................................... 38Windscreen wiper/washer ........... 88Winter tyres ............................... 261Wiper blade replacement .......... 244

Copyright by General Motors UK Ltd.

The information contained in this publication is effective as of the date indicated below. General Motors UK Ltd. reserves the right to make changes to the technical specifications,features and design of the vehicles relative to the information contained in this publication, as well as changes to the publication itself.

Edition: September 2017, General Motors UK Ltd.

Printed on chlorine-free bleached paper.

*ID-VINBORIE1709-EN*

ID-VINBORIE1709-en

insignia, v.8 (rev 2), en-vx (work nr: pp-109519a 50) · 2019. 11. 7. · 8 in brief head restraint...

Documents